Precision Analog Microcontroller, 12-Bit Analog I/O, ARM7TDMI MCU ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet FEATURES On-chip peripherals UART, 2x I2C(R) and SPI serial I/O Up to 40-pin GPIO port1 4x general-purpose timers Wake-up and watchdog timers (WDT) Power supply monitor 3-phase, 16-bit PWM generator1 Programmable logic array (PLA) External memory interface, up to 512 kB1 Power Specified for 3 V operation Active mode: 11 mA @ 5 MHz, 40 mA @ 41.78 MHz Packages and temperature range From 40-lead 6 mm x 6 mm LFCSP to 80-lead LQFP1 Fully specified for -40C to +125C operation Tools Low cost QuickStartTM development system Full third-party support Analog I/O Multichannel, 12-bit, 1 MSPS ADC Up to 16 ADC channels1 Fully differential and single-ended modes 0 V to VREF analog input range 12-bit voltage output DACs Up to 4 DAC outputs available1 On-chip voltage reference On-chip temperature sensor (3C) Voltage comparator Microcontroller ARM7TDMI core, 16-bit/32-bit RISC architecture JTAG port supports code download and debug Clocking options Trimmed on-chip oscillator (3%) External watch crystal External clock source up to 44 MHz 41.78 MHz PLL with programmable divider Memory 62 kB Flash/EE memory, 8 kB SRAM In-circuit download, JTAG-based debug Software-triggered in-circuit reprogrammability APPLICATIONS Industrial control and automation systems Smart sensors, precision instrumentation Base station systems, optical networking FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM ADC0 TO ADC4, ADC12 TO ADC14 MUX ADC15 1MSPS 12-BIT ADC ADuC7019 TEMP SENSOR CMP0 CMP1 12-BIT DAC DAC0 12-BIT DAC DAC1 12-BIT DAC DAC2 BAND GAP REF CMPOUT VREF XCLKO OSC AND PLL PSM RST POR 3-PHASE PWM ARM7TDMI-BASED MCU WITH ADDITIONAL PERIPHERALS PLA 2k x 32 SRAM 31k x 16 FLASH/EEPROM 4 GENERALPURPOSE TIMERS SERIAL I/O UART, SPI, I2C (SEE NOTE 1) GPIO JTAG 04955-100 XCLKI NOTES 1. SEE APPLICATION NOTE AN-798. Figure 1. 1 Depending on part model. See Ordering Guide for more information. Rev. G Document Feedback Information furnished by Analog Devices is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by Analog Devices for its use, nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties that may result from its use. Specifications subject to change without notice. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of Analog Devices. Trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. One Technology Way, P.O. Box 9106, Norwood, MA 02062-9106, U.S.A. Tel: 781.329.4700 (c)2005-2015 Analog Devices, Inc. All rights reserved. Technical Support www.analog.com ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet TABLE OF CONTENTS Features .............................................................................................. 1 Calibration................................................................................... 50 Applications ....................................................................................... 1 Temperature Sensor ................................................................... 50 Functional Block Diagram .............................................................. 1 Band Gap Reference ................................................................... 50 Revision History ............................................................................... 3 Nonvolatile Flash/EE Memory ..................................................... 51 General Description ......................................................................... 4 Programming .............................................................................. 51 Detailed Block Diagram .............................................................. 9 Security ........................................................................................ 52 Specifications................................................................................... 10 Flash/EE Control Interface ....................................................... 52 Timing Specifications ................................................................ 13 Execution Time from SRAM and Flash/EE ............................ 54 Absolute Maximum Ratings.......................................................... 20 Reset and Remap ........................................................................ 54 ESD Caution ................................................................................ 20 Other Analog Peripherals .............................................................. 56 Pin Configurations and Function Descriptions ......................... 21 DAC.............................................................................................. 56 ADuC7019/ADuC7020/ADuC7021/ADuC7022 .................. 21 Power Supply Monitor ............................................................... 57 ADuC7024/ADuC7025 ............................................................. 25 Comparator ................................................................................. 57 ADuC7026/ADuC7027 ............................................................. 28 Oscillator and PLL--Power Control ........................................ 58 ADuC7028 ................................................................................... 31 Digital Peripherals .......................................................................... 61 ADuC7029 ................................................................................... 33 3-Phase PWM ............................................................................. 61 Typical Performance Characteristics ........................................... 35 Description of the PWM Block ................................................ 62 Terminology .................................................................................... 38 General-Purpose Input/Output................................................ 67 ADC Specifications .................................................................... 38 Serial Port Mux ........................................................................... 70 DAC Specifications..................................................................... 38 UART Serial Interface ................................................................ 70 Overview of the ARM7TDMI Core ............................................. 39 Serial Peripheral Interface ......................................................... 74 Thumb Mode (T)........................................................................ 39 I2C-Compatible Interfaces......................................................... 76 Long Multiply (M) ...................................................................... 39 Programmable Logic Array (PLA)........................................... 80 EmbeddedICE (I) ....................................................................... 39 Processor Reference Peripherals................................................... 83 Exceptions ................................................................................... 39 Interrupt System ......................................................................... 83 ARM Registers ............................................................................ 39 Timers .......................................................................................... 84 Interrupt Latency ........................................................................ 40 External Memory Interfacing ................................................... 89 Memory Organization ................................................................... 41 Hardware Design Considerations ................................................ 93 Memory Access ........................................................................... 41 Power Supplies ............................................................................ 93 Flash/EE Memory ....................................................................... 41 Grounding and Board Layout Recommendations................. 94 SRAM ........................................................................................... 41 Clock Oscillator .......................................................................... 94 Memory Mapped Registers ....................................................... 41 Power-On Reset Operation ....................................................... 95 ADC Circuit Overview .................................................................. 45 Typical System Configuration .................................................. 95 Transfer Function ....................................................................... 45 Development Tools......................................................................... 96 Typical Operation ....................................................................... 46 PC-Based Tools ........................................................................... 96 MMRs Interface .......................................................................... 46 In-Circuit Serial Downloader ................................................... 96 Converter Operation .................................................................. 48 Outline Dimensions ....................................................................... 97 Driving the Analog Inputs ........................................................ 49 Ordering Guide ........................................................................ 100 Rev. G | Page 2 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 REVISION HISTORY 12/15--Rev. F to Rev. G Changed CP-40-1 to CP-40-9 ........................................... Universal Updated Outline Dimensions ........................................................97 Deleted Figure 96 (CP-40-1); Renumbered Sequentially ..........97 Changes to Ordering Guide .........................................................101 5/13--Rev. E to Rev. F Changes to Figure 1........................................................................... 1 Added Figure 2 to Figure 10; Renumbered Sequentially ............. 4 Changes to Figure 19; Added Figure 20 .......................................21 Changes to EPAD Note in Figure 21 and Figure 22 ..................... 22 Changes to EPAD Note in Table 11................................................... 23 Changes to EPAD Note in Figure 23 ............................................25 Changes to EPAD Note in Table 12 ..............................................26 Changes to Table 14 ........................................................................31 Changes to Table 15 ........................................................................33 Changes to Table 82 ........................................................................68 Added Table 83, Figure 73, Figure 74, Following Text, and Table 84; Renumbered Sequentially ..............................................69 Changes to Bit 2 Description, Table 98 ........................................71 Changes to Table 101 ......................................................................72 Changes to Timer2 (Wake-Up Timer) Section ...........................87 Changes to Figure 94 ......................................................................95 Updated Outline Dimensions ........................................................97 Changes to Ordering Guide .........................................................101 7/12--Rev. D to Rev. E Changed SCLOCK to SCLK When Refering to SPI Clock, SPIMISO to MISO when Refering to SPI MISO, SPIMOSI to MOSI when Refering to SPI MOSI, and SPICSL to CS when Refering to SPI Chip Select ............................................... Universal Changes to Table 4, Table 5, and Figure 5 ....................................11 Changes to Endnote 1 in Table 6 and Figure 6 ............................12 Changes to Table 7 and Figure 7 ...................................................13 Changes to Table 8 and Figure 8 ...................................................14 Changes to Table 9 and Figure 9 ...................................................15 Changed EPAD Note in Figure 12 and Table 11 .........................18 Changed EPAD Note in Figure 13 and Table 12 .........................21 Changes to Bit 6 in Table 18...........................................................43 Changes to Example Source Code (External Crystal Selection) Section and Example Source Code (External Clock Selection) Section ..............................................................................................55 Changes to Serial Peripheral Interface Section ...........................69 Changes to SPICON[10] and SPICON[9] Descriptions in Table 123............................................................................................70 Changes to Timer Interval Down Equation and Added Timer Interval Up Equation ......................................................................79 Added Hour:Minute:Second:1/128 Format Section ...................80 Changes to Table 189 ......................................................................84 Removed CP-40-10 Package ..........................................................92 Changes to Ordering Guide ...........................................................96 5/11--Rev. C to Rev. D Changes to Table 4 ..........................................................................11 Changes to Table 105 ...................................................................... 67 Updated Outline Dimensions........................................................ 91 Changes to Ordering Guide ........................................................... 94 12/09--Rev. B to Rev. C Added ADuC7029 Part ..................................................... Universal Added Table Numbers and Renumbered Tables ............... Universal Changes to Figure Numbers ............................................. Universal Changes to Table 1 ............................................................................ 6 Changes to Figure 3 ......................................................................... 9 Changes to Table 3 and Figure 4 ................................................... 10 Changes to Table 10 ........................................................................ 16 Changes to Figure 55 ...................................................................... 53 Changes to Serial Peripheral Interface Section ........................... 69 Changes to Table 137 ...................................................................... 73 Changes to Figure 71 and Figure 72 ............................................. 85 Changes to Figure 73 and Figure 74 ............................................. 86 Updated Outline Dimensions........................................................ 91 Changes to Ordering Guide ........................................................... 94 3/07--Rev. A to Rev. B Added ADuC7028 Part ..................................................... Universal Updated Format ................................................................. Universal Changes to Figure 2 .......................................................................... 5 Changes to Table 1 ............................................................................ 6 Changes to ADuC7026/ADuC7027 Section ............................... 23 Changes to Figure 21 ...................................................................... 28 Changes to Figure 32 Caption ....................................................... 30 Changes to Table 14 ........................................................................ 35 Changes to ADC Circuit Overview Section ................................ 38 Changes to Programming Section ................................................ 44 Changes to Flash/EE Control Interface Section.......................... 45 Changes to Table 24 ........................................................................ 47 Changes to RSTCLR Register Section .......................................... 48 Changes to Figure 52 ...................................................................... 49 Changes to Figure 53 ...................................................................... 50 Changes to Comparator Section ................................................... 50 Changes to Oscillator and PLL--Power Control Section .......... 51 Changes to Digital Peripherals Section ........................................ 54 Changes to Interrupt System Section ........................................... 75 Changes to Timers Section ............................................................ 76 Changes to External Memory Interfacing Section ..................... 80 Added IOVDD Supply Sensitivity Section ..................................... 84 Changes to Ordering Guide ........................................................... 90 1/06--Rev. 0 to Rev. A Changes to Table 1 ............................................................................ 6 Added the Flash/EE Memory Reliability Section ....................... 43 Changes to Table 30 ........................................................................ 52 Changes to Serial Peripheral Interface ......................................... 66 Changes to Ordering Guide ........................................................... 90 10/05--Revision 0: Initial Version Rev. G | Page 3 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet GENERAL DESCRIPTION The devices operate from an on-chip oscillator and a PLL generating an internal high frequency clock of 41.78 MHz (UCLK). This clock is routed through a programmable clock divider from which the MCU core clock operating frequency is generated. The microcontroller core is an ARM7TDMI(R), 16-bit/32-bit RISC machine, which offers up to 41 MIPS peak performance. Eight kilobytes of SRAM and 62 kilobytes of nonvolatile Flash/EE memory are provided on-chip. The ARM7TDMI core views all memory and registers as a single linear array. The ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 are fully integrated, 1 MSPS, 12-bit data acquisition systems incorporating high performance multichannel ADCs, 16-bit/32-bit MCUs, and Flash(R)/EE memory on a single chip. The ADC consists of up to 12 single-ended inputs. An additional four inputs are available but are multiplexed with the four DAC output pins. The four DAC outputs are available only on certain models (ADuC7020, ADuC7026, ADuC7028, and ADuC7029). However, in many cases where the DAC outputs are not present, these pins can still be used as additional ADC inputs, giving a maximum of 16 ADC input channels. The ADC can operate in single-ended or differential input mode. The ADC input voltage is 0 V to VREF. A low drift band gap reference, temperature sensor, and voltage comparator complete the ADC peripheral set. On-chip factory firmware supports in-circuit serial download via the UART or I2C serial interface port; nonintrusive emulation is also supported via the JTAG interface. These features are incorporated into a low cost QuickStartTM development system supporting this MicroConverter(R) family. Depending on the part model, up to four buffered voltage output DACs are available on-chip. The DAC output range is programmable to one of three voltage ranges. ADC0 TO ADC4, ADC12 TO ADC15 MUX 1MSPS 12-BIT ADC The parts operate from 2.7 V to 3.6 V and are specified over an industrial temperature range of -40C to +125C. When operating at 41.78 MHz, the power dissipation is typically 120 mW. The ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 are available in a variety of memory models and packages (see Ordering Guide). ADuC7020 TEMP SENSOR CMP0 CMP1 BAND GAP REF CMPOUT 12-BIT DAC DAC0 12-BIT DAC DAC1 12-BIT DAC DAC2 12-BIT DAC DAC3 VREF XCLKO OSC AND PLL PSM RST POR 3-PHASE PWM ARM7TDMI-BASED MCU WITH ADDITIONAL PERIPHERALS PLA 2k x 32 SRAM 31k x 16 FLASH/EEPROM 4 GENERALPURPOSE TIMERS SERIAL I/O UART, SPI, I2C (SEE NOTE 1) GPIO JTAG 04955-101 XCLKI NOTES 1. SEE APPLICATION NOTE AN-798. Figure 2. Rev. G | Page 4 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 ADC0 TO ADC7, ADC12 TO ADC13 1MSPS 12-BIT ADC MUX ADuC7021 12-BIT DAC DAC0 12-BIT DAC DAC1 TEMP SENSOR CMP0 CMP1 BAND GAP REF CMPOUT VREF OSC AND PLL XCLKO 2k x 32 SRAM 31k x 16 FLASH/EEPROM PLA PSM RST 3-PHASE PWM ARM7TDMI-BASED MCU WITH ADDITIONAL PERIPHERALS 4 GENERALPURPOSE TIMERS POR SERIAL I/O UART, SPI, I2C (SEE NOTE 1) GPIO JTAG 04955-102 XCLKI NOTES 1. SEE APPLICATION NOTE AN-798. Figure 3. ADC0 TO ADC9 MUX 1MSPS 12-BIT ADC ADuC7022 TEMP SENSOR CMP0 CMP1 BAND GAP REF CMPOUT VREF XCLKO OSC AND PLL PSM RST POR 3-PHASE PWM ARM7TDMI-BASED MCU WITH ADDITIONAL PERIPHERALS PLA 2k x 32 SRAM 31k x 16 FLASH/EEPROM 4 GENERALPURPOSE TIMERS SERIAL I/O UART, SPI, I2C (SEE NOTE 1) GPIO JTAG 04955-103 XCLKI NOTES 1. SEE APPLICATION NOTE AN-798. Figure 4. Rev. G | Page 5 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 ADC0 TO ADC9, ADC12, ADC13 MUX 1MSPS 12-BIT ADC Data Sheet ADuC7024 12-BIT DAC DAC0 12-BIT DAC DAC1 TEMP SENSOR CMP0 CMP1 BAND GAP REF CMPOUT VREF OSC AND PLL PLA PSM RST ARM7TDMI-BASED MCU WITH ADDITIONAL PERIPHERALS 2k x 32 SRAM 31k x 16 FLASH/EEPROM 4 GENERALPURPOSE TIMERS POR SERIAL I/O UART, SPI, I2C (SEE NOTE 1) GPIO PWM0H PWM0L PWM1H PWM1L PWM2H PWM2L JTAG 04955-104 XCLKI XCLKO 3-PHASE PWM NOTES 1. SEE APPLICATION NOTE AN-798. Figure 5. ADC0 TO ADC9, ADC12, ADC13 MUX 1MSPS 12-BIT ADC ADuC7025 TEMP SENSOR CMP0 CMP1 BAND GAP REF CMPOUT VREF OSC AND PLL PSM RST POR ARM7TDMI-BASED MCU WITH ADDITIONAL PERIPHERALS PLA 2k x 32 SRAM 31k x 16 FLASH/EEPROM 4 GENERALPURPOSE TIMERS SERIAL I/O UART, SPI, I2C (SEE NOTE 1) GPIO PWM0H PWM0L PWM1H PWM1L PWM2H PWM2L JTAG 04955-105 XCLKI XCLKO 3-PHASE PWM NOTES 1. SEE APPLICATION NOTE AN-798. Figure 6. Rev. G | Page 6 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 MUX ADC0 TO ADC15 1MSPS 12-BIT ADC ADuC7026 TEMP SENSOR CMP0 CMP1 BAND GAP REF CMPOUT 12-BIT DAC DAC0 12-BIT DAC DAC1 12-BIT DAC DAC2 12-BIT DAC DAC3 VREF XCLKI XCLKO OSC AND PLL PLA PSM RST 2k x 32 SRAM 31k x 16 FLASH/EEPROM 4 GENERALPURPOSE TIMERS POR 3-PHASE PWM ARM7TDMI-BASED MCU WITH ADDITIONAL PERIPHERALS SERIAL I/O UART, SPI, I2C GPIO JTAG PWM0H PWM0L PWM1H PWM1L PWM2H PWM2L EXT. MEMORY INTERFACE 04955-106 Data Sheet Figure 7. MUX ADC0 TO ADC15 1MSPS 12-BIT ADC ADuC7027 TEMP SENSOR CMP0 CMP1 BAND GAP REF VREF XCLKI XCLKO OSC AND PLL PSM RST POR 3-PHASE PWM ARM7TDMI-BASED MCU WITH ADDITIONAL PERIPHERALS PLA 2k x 32 SRAM 31k x 16 FLASH/EEPROM 4 GENERALPURPOSE TIMERS SERIAL I/O UART, SPI, I2C Figure 8. Rev. G | Page 7 of 101 GPIO JTAG EXT. MEMORY INTERFACE PWM0H PWM0L PWM1H PWM1L PWM2H PWM2L 04955-107 CMPOUT ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 ADC0 TO ADC7, ADC12 TO ADC15 MUX 1MSPS 12-BIT ADC Data Sheet ADuC7028 TEMP SENSOR CMP0 CMP1 BAND GAP REF CMPOUT 12-BIT DAC DAC0 12-BIT DAC DAC1 12-BIT DAC DAC2 12-BIT DAC DAC3 VREF OSC AND PLL PLA PSM RST 2k x 32 SRAM 31k x 16 FLASH/EEPROM 4 GENERALPURPOSE TIMERS POR 3-PHASE PWM ARM7TDMI-BASED MCU WITH ADDITIONAL PERIPHERALS SERIAL I/O UART, SPI, I2C GPIO JTAG 04955-108 XCLKI XCLKO PWM0H PWM0L PWM1H PWM1L PWM2H PWM2L Figure 9. MUX 1MSPS 12-BIT ADC ADuC7029 TEMP SENSOR CMP0 CMP1 BAND GAP REF CMPOUT 12-BIT DAC DAC0 12-BIT DAC DAC1 12-BIT DAC DAC2 12-BIT DAC DAC3 VREF OSC AND PLL PSM RST POR 3-PHASE PWM ARM7TDMI-BASED MCU WITH ADDITIONAL PERIPHERALS PLA 2k x 32 SRAM 31k x 16 FLASH/EEPROM 4 GENERALPURPOSE TIMERS SERIAL I/O UART, SPI, I2C Figure 10. Rev. G | Page 8 of 101 GPIO JTAG PWM0H PWM0L PWM1H PWM1L PWM2H PWM2L 04955-109 ADC0 TO ADC6, ADC12 TO ADC15 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 ADC0 77 ADC1 78 ADC2/CMP0 79 ADC3/CMP1 80 ADC4 1 ADC5 2 ADC6 3 ADC7 4 ADC8 5 ADC9 6 ADC10 7 ADC11 76 ADCNEG 9 GNDREF AGND AGND REFGND AVDD AVDD IOGND IOVDD IOGND IOVDD DGND LVDD RST DACV DD DACGND DAC REF DETAILED BLOCK DIAGRAM 8 72 71 67 73 74 53 26 25 54 28 27 37 75 70 69 ADuC7026* 12-BIT SAR ADC 1MSPS DAC CONTROL MUX TEMP SENSOR MUX DAC BM/P0.0/CMPOUT/PLAI[7]/MS0 ADC CONTROL BUF 10 DAC0*/ADC12 12-BIT VOLTAGE OUTPUT DAC BUF 11 DAC1*/ADC13 12-BIT VOLTAGE OUTPUT DAC BUF 12 DAC2*/ADC14 12-BIT VOLTAGE OUTPUT DAC BUF 13 DAC3*/ADC15 29 P3.0/AD0/PWM0H/PLAI[8] 30 P3.1/AD1/PWM0L/PLAI[9] 31 P3.2/AD2/PWM1H/PLAI[10] 32 P3.3/AD3/PWM1L/PLAI[11] 38 P3.4/AD4/PWM2H/PLAI[12] 39 P3.5/AD5/PWM2L/PLAI[13] 46 P3.6/AD6/PWMTRIP/PLAI[14] 47 P3.7/AD7/PWMSYNC/PLAI[15] 44 XCLKO 45 XCLKI 43 P0.7/ECLK/XCLK/SPM8/PLAO[4] 40 IRQ0/P0.4/PWMTRIP/PLAO[1]/MS1 41 IRQ1/P0.5/ADCBUSY/PLAO[2]/MS2 62kB FLASH/EE (31k x 16 BITS) CMPOUT/IRQ ARM7TDMI 8192 BYTES USER RAM (2k x 32 BITS) 3-PHASE PWM WAKE-UP/ RTC TIMER MCU CORE 20 POWER SUPPLY MONITOR DOWNLOADER VREF 12-BIT VOLTAGE OUTPUT DAC VREF 68 34 21 49 50 Figure 11. Rev. G | Page 9 of 101 17 33 35 36 48 24 16 P0.1/PWM2H/BLE 22 P0.2/PWM2L/BHE 23 P2.7/PWM1L/MS3 15 P2.3/AE 14 P2.4/PWM0H/MS0 P1.2/SPM2/PLAI[2] 42 P2.2/RS/PWM0L/PLAO[7] P1.1/SPM1/PLAI[1] 51 P2.1/WS/PWM0H/PLAO[6] P1.0/T1/SPM0/PLAI[0] 52 P0.6/T1/MRST/PLAO[3] P4.5/AD13/PLAO[13] 57 TCK P4.4/AD12/PLAO[12] 58 P0.3/TRST/A16/ADC BUSY P4.3/AD11/PLAO[11] 59 TDI 60 TDO 61 TMS 62 P2.0/SPM9/PLAO[5]/CONVSTART 66 P1.7/SPM7/PLAO[0] 65 P1.6/SPM6/PLAI[6] 64 P1.5/SPM5/PLAI[5]/IRQ3 63 P1.3/SPM3/PLAI[3] 56 P1.4/SPM4/PLAI[4]/IRQ2 55 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER POR SERIAL PORT MULTIPLEXER P2.5/PWM0L/MS1 UART SERIAL PORT PLL P2.6/PWM1H/MS2 JTAG EMULATOR SPI/I2C SERIAL INTERFACE P4.2/AD10/PLAO[10] 19 PROG. LOGIC ARRAY P4.1/AD9/PLAO[9] P4.7/AD15/PLAO[15] 18 P4.0/AD8/PLAO[8] P4.6/AD14/PLAO[14] PROG. CLOCK DIVIDER * SEE ORDERING GUIDE FOR FEATURE AVAILABILITY ON DIFFERENT MODELS. 04955-002 OSC BAND GAP REFERENCE ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet SPECIFICATIONS AVDD = IOVDD = 2.7 V to 3.6 V, VREF = 2.5 V internal reference, fCORE = 41.78 MHz, TA = -40C to +125C, unless otherwise noted. Table 1. Parameter ADC CHANNEL SPECIFICATIONS ADC Power-Up Time DC Accuracy1, 2 Resolution Integral Nonlinearity Min Max 5 Unit Test Conditions/Comments Eight acquisition clocks and fADC/2 s 12 0.6 1.0 0.5 +0.7/-0.6 1 Differential Nonlinearity3, 4 DC Code Distribution ENDPOINT ERRORS5 Offset Error Offset Error Match Gain Error Gain Error Match DYNAMIC PERFORMANCE Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) Peak Harmonic or Spurious Noise (PHSN) Channel-to-Channel Crosstalk ANALOG INPUT Input Voltage Ranges Differential Mode Single-Ended Mode Leakage Current Input Capacitance ON-CHIP VOLTAGE REFERENCE Output Voltage Accuracy Reference Temperature Coefficient Power Supply Rejection Ratio Output Impedance Internal VREF Power-On Time EXTERNAL REFERENCE INPUT Input Voltage Range DAC CHANNEL SPECIFICATIONS DC Accuracy7 Resolution Relative Accuracy Differential Nonlinearity Offset Error Gain Error8 Gain Error Mismatch ANALOG OUTPUTS Output Voltage Range_0 Output Voltage Range_1 Output Voltage Range_2 Output Impedance Typ 1.5 +1/-0.9 1 1 2 1 2 5 Bits LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB 69 -78 -75 dB dB dB -80 dB VCM6 VREF/2 0 to VREF 6 1 20 2.5 5 40 75 70 1 0.625 AVDD 2.5 V internal reference 1.0 V external reference 2.5 V internal reference 1.0 V external reference ADC input is a dc voltage V V A pF V mV ppm/C dB ms fIN = 10 kHz sine wave, fSAMPLE = 1 MSPS Includes distortion and noise components Measured on adjacent channels During ADC acquisition 0.47 F from VREF to AGND TA = 25C TA = 25C V RL = 5 k, CL = 100 pF 12 2 0.1 Bits LSB LSB mV % % 0 to DACREF 0 to 2.5 0 to DACVDD 2 V V V 1 15 1 Rev. G | Page 10 of 101 Guaranteed monotonic 2.5 V internal reference % of full scale on DAC0 DACREF range: DACGND to DACVDD Data Sheet Parameter DAC AC CHARACTERISTICS Voltage Output Settling Time Digital-to-Analog Glitch Energy COMPARATOR Input Offset Voltage Input Bias Current Input Voltage Range Input Capacitance Hysteresis4, 6 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Min Input Capacitance LOGIC INPUTS3 VINL, Input Low Voltage VINH, Input High Voltage LOGIC OUTPUTS VOH, Output High Voltage VOL, Output Low Voltage11 CRYSTAL INPUTS XCLKI and XCLKO Logic Inputs, XCLKI Only VINL, Input Low Voltage VINH, Input High Voltage XCLKI Input Capacitance XCLKO Output Capacitance INTERNAL OSCILLATOR Max Unit 10 20 s nV-sec 15 1 mV A V pF mV AGND AVDD - 1.2 7 2 Response Time TEMPERATURE SENSOR Voltage Output at 25C Voltage TC Accuracy POWER SUPPLY MONITOR (PSM) IOVDD Trip Point Selection Power Supply Trip Point Accuracy POWER-ON-RESET GLITCH IMMUNITY ON RESET PIN4 WATCHDOG TIMER (WDT) Timeout Period FLASH/EE MEMORY Endurance9 Data Retention10 DIGITAL INPUTS Logic 1 Input Current Logic 0 Input Current Typ 15 3 s 780 -1.3 3 mV mV/C C 2.79 3.07 2.5 2.36 50 V V % V s 0 512 10,000 20 Test Conditions/Comments 1 LSB change at major carry (where maximum number of bits simultaneously changes in the DACxDAT register) Hysteresis turned on or off via the CMPHYST bit in the CMPCON register 100 mV overdrive and configured with CMPRES = 11 Two selectable trip points Of the selected nominal trip point voltage sec Cycles Years 0.2 -40 1 -60 A A -80 10 -120 A pF 0.8 V V TJ = 85C All digital inputs excluding XCLKI and XCLKO VIH = IOVDD or VIH = 5 V VIL = 0 V; except TDI on ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/29 VIL = 0 V; TDI on ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/29 All logic inputs excluding XCLKI 2.0 0.4 V V All digital outputs excluding XCLKO ISOURCE = 1.6 mA ISINK = 1.6 mA 3 24 V V pF pF kHz % % TA = 0C to 85C range 2.4 1.1 1.7 20 20 32.768 Rev. G | Page 11 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Parameter MCU CLOCK RATE From 32 kHz Internal Oscillator From 32 kHz External Crystal Using an External Clock Min DACVDD Current15 Digital Power Supply Current IOVDD Current in Normal Mode IOVDD Current in Pause Mode IOVDD Current in Sleep Mode Additional Power Supply Currents ADC DAC ESD TESTS HBM Passed Up To FCIDM Passed Up To Max Unit Test Conditions/Comments 44 41.78 kHz MHz MHz MHz CD12 = 7 CD12 = 0 TA = 85C TA = 125C Core clock = 41.78 MHz 326 41.78 0.05 0.05 START-UP TIME At Power-On From Pause/Nap Mode From Sleep Mode From Stop Mode PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC ARRAY (PLA) Pin Propagation Delay Element Propagation Delay POWER REQUIREMENTS13, 14 Power Supply Voltage Range AVDD to AGND and IOVDD to IOGND Analog Power Supply Currents AVDD Current Typ Data Sheet 130 24 3.06 1.58 1.7 ms ns s ms ms 12 2.5 ns ns 2.7 3.6 V 200 400 3 25 A A A 7 11 40 25 250 600 10 15 45 30 400 1000 mA mA mA mA A A 2 0.7 700 mA mA A 4 0.5 CD12 = 0 CD12 = 7 From input pin to output pin ADC in idle mode; all parts except ADuC7019 ADC in idle mode; ADuC7019 only Code executing from Flash/EE CD12 = 7 CD12 = 3 CD12 = 0 (41.78 MHz clock) CD12 = 0 (41.78 MHz clock) TA = 85C TA = 125C @ 1 MSPS @ 62.5 kSPS per DAC 2.5 V reference, TA = 25C kV kV 1 All ADC channel specifications are guaranteed during normal MicroConverter core operation. Apply to all ADC input channels. Measured using the factory-set default values in the ADC offset register (ADCOF) and gain coefficient register (ADCGN). 4 Not production tested but supported by design and/or characterization data on production release. 5 Measured using the factory-set default values in ADCOF and ADCGN with an external AD845 op amp as an input buffer stage as shown in Figure 59. Based on external ADC system components; the user may need to execute a system calibration to remove external endpoint errors and achieve these specifications (see the Calibration section). 6 The input signal can be centered on any dc common-mode voltage (VCM) as long as this value is within the ADC voltage input range specified. 7 DAC linearity is calculated using a reduced code range of 100 to 3995. 8 DAC gain error is calculated using a reduced code range of 100 to internal 2.5 V VREF. 9 Endurance is qualified as per JEDEC Standard 22, Method A117 and measured at -40C, +25C, +85C, and +125C. 10 Retention lifetime equivalent at junction temperature (TJ) = 85C as per JEDEC Standard 22m, Method A117. Retention lifetime derates with junction temperature. 11 Test carried out with a maximum of eight I/Os set to a low output level. 12 See the POWCON register. 13 Power supply current consumption is measured in normal, pause, and sleep modes under the following conditions: normal mode with 3.6 V supply, pause mode with 3.6 V supply, and sleep mode with 3.6 V supply. 14 IOVDD power supply current decreases typically by 2 mA during a Flash/EE erase cycle. 15 On the ADuC7019/20/21/22, this current must be added to the AVDD current. 2 3 Rev. G | Page 12 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 TIMING SPECIFICATIONS Table 2. External Memory Write Cycle Parameter CLK1 tMS_AFTER_CLKH tADDR_AFTER_CLKH tAE_H_AFTER_MS tAE tHOLD_ADDR_AFTER_AE_L tHOLD_ADDR_BEFORE_WR_L tWR_L_AFTER_AE_L tDATA_AFTER_WR_L tWR tWR_H_AFTER_CLKH tHOLD_DATA_AFTER_WR_H tBEN_AFTER_AE_L tRELEASE_MS_AFTER_WR_H Typ UCLK 0 4 Max Unit 4 8 ns ns 12 ns 4 ns 1/2 CLK (XMxPAR[14:12] + 1) x CLK 1/2 CLK + (!XMxPAR[10]) x CLK (!XMxPAR[8]) x CLK 1/2 CLK + (!XMxPAR[10] + !XMxPAR[8]) x CLK 8 (XMxPAR[7:4] + 1) x CLK 0 (!XMxPAR[8]) x CLK 1/2 CLK (!XMxPAR[8] + 1) x CLK See Table 78. CLK CLK tMS_AFTER_CLKH MSx tWR_L_AFTER_AE_L tAE_H_AFTER_MS AE tAE tWR tRELEASE_MS_AFTER_WR_H tWR_H_AFTER_CLKH WS tHOLD_DATA_AFTER_WR_H RS tHOLD_ADDR_AFTER_AE_L tHOLD_ADDR_BEFORE_WR_L tADDR_AFTER_CLKH AD[16:1] FFFF 9ABC tDATA_AFTER_WR_L 5678 9ABE 1234 tBEN_AFTER_AE_L BLE BHE 04955-052 1 Min A16 Figure 12. External Memory Write Cycle (See Table 78) Rev. G | Page 13 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet Table 3. External Memory Read Cycle Parameter CLK1 tMS_AFTER_CLKH tADDR_AFTER_CLKH tAE_H_AFTER_MS tAE tHOLD_ADDR_AFTER_AE_L tRD_L_AFTER_AE_L tRD_H_AFTER_CLKH tRD tDATA_BEFORE_RD_H tDATA_AFTER_RD_H tRELEASE_MS_AFTER_RD_H Typ ns typ x (POWCON[2:0] + 1) Max Unit 8 16 ns ns 1/2 CLK (XMxPAR[14:12] + 1) x CLK 1/2 CLK + (! XMxPAR[10] ) x CLK 1/2 CLK + (! XMxPAR[10]+ ! XMxPAR[9] ) x CLK 0 4 (XMxPAR[3:0] + 1) x CLK 16 8 ns + (! XMxPAR[9]) x CLK 1 x CLK See Table 78. CLK ECLK tMS_AFTER_CLKH MSx tAE_H_AFTER_MS tAE tRELEASE_MS_AFTER_RD_H tRD_L_AFTER_AE_L AE WS tRD tRD_H_AFTER_CLKH RS tADDR_AFTER_CLKH tDATA_BEFORE_RD_H tDATA_AFTER_RD_H AD[16:1] FFFF 2348 XXXX CDEF XX 234A XX 89AB tHOLD_ADDR_AFTER_AE_L BHE BLE 04955-053 1 Min 1/MD clock 4 4 A16 Figure 13. External Memory Read Cycle (See Table 78) Rev. G | Page 14 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Table 4. I2C Timing in Fast Mode (400 kHz) Parameter tL tH tSHD tDSU tDHD tRSU tPSU tBUF tR tF tSUP 1 Description SCL low pulse width1 SCL high pulse width1 Start condition hold time Data setup time Data hold time Setup time for repeated start Stop condition setup time Bus-free time between a stop condition and a start condition Rise time for both SCL and SDA Fall time for both SCL and SDA Pulse width of spike suppressed Min 200 100 300 100 0 100 100 1.3 Slave Max Master Typ 1360 1140 Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns s ns ns ns 740 400 400 300 300 50 200 tHCLK depends on the clock divider or CD bits in the POWCON MMR. tHCLK = tUCLK/2CD; see Figure 67. Table 5. I2C Timing in Standard Mode (100 kHz) Parameter tL tH tSHD tDSU tDHD tRSU tPSU tBUF tR tF Description SCL low pulse width1 SCL high pulse width1 Start condition hold time Data setup time Data hold time Setup time for repeated start Stop condition setup time Bus-free time between a stop condition and a start condition Rise time for both SCL and SDA Fall time for both SCL and SDA Master Typ Unit s ns s ns s s s s s ns tHCLK depends on the clock divider or CD bits in the POWCON MMR. tHCLK = tUCLK/2CD; see Figure 67. tBUF tSUP tR SDA (I/O) MSB tDSU LSB tSHD P S tF tDHD 2-7 tR tRSU tH 1 SCL (I) MSB tDSU tDHD tPSU ACK 8 tL 9 tSUP STOP START CONDITION CONDITION 1 S(R) REPEATED START Figure 14. I2C Compatible Interface Timing Rev. G | Page 15 of 101 tF 04955-054 1 Slave Min Max 4.7 4.0 4.0 250 0 3.45 4.7 4.0 4.7 1 300 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet Table 6. SPI Master Mode Timing (Phase Mode = 1) Parameter tSL tSH tDAV tDSU tDHD tDF tDR tSR tSF 2 Min Typ (SPIDIV + 1) x tHCLK (SPIDIV + 1) x tHCLK Max 25 1 x tUCLK 2 x tUCLK 5 5 5 5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 tHCLK depends on the clock divider or CD bits in the POWCONMMR. tHCLK = tUCLK/2CD; see Figure 67. tUCLK = 23.9 ns. It corresponds to the 41.78 MHz internal clock from the PLL before the clock divider; see Figure 67. SCLK (POLARITY = 0) tSH tSL tSR SCLK (POLARITY = 1) tDAV tDF MOSI MISO tDR MSB MSB IN tSF BITS 6 TO 1 BITS 6 TO 1 tDSU tDHD Figure 15. SPI Master Mode Timing (Phase Mode = 1) Rev. G | Page 16 of 101 LSB LSB IN 04955-055 1 Description SCLK low pulse width1 SCLK high pulse width1 Data output valid after SCLK edge Data input setup time before SCLK edge2 Data input hold time after SCLK edge2 Data output fall time Data output rise time SCLK rise time SCLK fall time Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Table 7. SPI Master Mode Timing (Phase Mode = 0) Parameter tSL tSH tDAV tDOSU tDSU tDHD tDF tDR tSR tSF 2 Min Typ (SPIDIV + 1) x tHCLK (SPIDIV + 1) x tHCLK Max 25 75 1 x tUCLK 2 x tUCLK 5 5 5 5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns tHCLK depends on the clock divider or CD bits in the POWCONMMR. tHCLK = tUCLK/2CD; see Figure 67. tUCLK = 23.9 ns. It corresponds to the 41.78 MHz internal clock from the PLL before the clock divider; see Figure 67. SCLK (POLARITY = 0) tSH tSL tSR tSF SCLK (POLARITY = 1) tDAV tDOSU MOSI MISO tDF MSB MSB IN tDR BITS 6 TO 1 BITS 6 TO 1 tDSU LSB LSB IN 04955-056 1 Description SCLK low pulse width1 SCLK high pulse width1 Data output valid after SCLK edge Data output setup before SCLK edge Data input setup time before SCLK edge2 Data input hold time after SCLK edge2 Data output fall time Data output rise time SCLK rise time SCLK fall time tDHD Figure 16. SPI Master Mode Timing (Phase Mode = 0) Rev. G | Page 17 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet Table 8. SPI Slave Mode Timing (Phsae Mode = 1) Parameter tCS Description CS to SCLK edge1 tSL tSH tDAV tDSU tDHD tDF tDR tSR tSF tSFS SCLK low pulse width2 SCLK high pulse width2 Data output valid after SCLK edge Data input setup time before SCLK edge1 Data input hold time after SCLK edge1 Data output fall time Data output rise time SCLK rise time SCLK fall time CS high after SCLK edge 2 Typ Max (SPIDIV + 1) x tHCLK (SPIDIV + 1) x tHCLK 25 1 x tUCLK 2 x tUCLK 5 5 5 5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 0 tUCLK = 23.9 ns. It corresponds to the 41.78 MHz internal clock from the PLL before the clock divider; see Figure 67. tHCLK depends on the clock divider or CD bits in the POWCONMMR. tHCLK = tUCLK/2CD; see Figure 67. CS tSFS tCS SCLK (POLARITY = 0) tSH tSL tSR tSF SCLK (POLARITY = 1) tDAV MISO tDF MSB MOSI MSB IN tDR BITS 6 TO 1 BITS 6 TO 1 tDSU tDHD Figure 17. SPI Slave Mode Timing (Phase Mode = 1) Rev. G | Page 18 of 101 LSB LSB IN 04955-057 1 Min (2 x tHCLK) + (2 x tUCLK) Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Table 9. SPI Slave Mode Timing (Phase Mode = 0) Parameter tCS Description CS to SCLK edge1 tSL tSH tDAV tDSU tDHD tDF tDR tSR tSF tDOCS tSFS SCLK low pulse width2 SCLK high pulse width2 Data output valid after SCLK edge Data input setup time before SCLK edge1 Data input hold time after SCLK edge1 Data output fall time Data output rise time SCLK rise time SCLK fall time Data output valid after CS edge CS high after SCLK edge 2 Typ Max Unit ns (SPIDIV + 1) x tHCLK (SPIDIV + 1) x tHCLK ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns 25 1 x tUCLK 2 x tUCLK 5 5 5 5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 25 0 tUCLK = 23.9 ns. It corresponds to the 41.78 MHz internal clock from the PLL before the clock divider; see Figure 67. tHCLK depends on the clock divider or CD bits in the POWCONMMR. tHCLK = tUCLK/2CD; see Figure 67. CS tCS tSFS SCLK (POLARITY = 0) tSH tSL tSF tSR SCLK (POLARITY = 1) tDAV tDOCS tDF MISO MOSI MSB MSB IN tDSU tDR BITS 6 TO 1 BITS 6 TO 1 LSB LSB IN 04955-058 1 Min (2 x tHCLK) + (2 x tUCLK) tDHD Figure 18. SPI Slave Mode Timing (Phase Mode = 0) Rev. G | Page 19 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS AGND = REFGND = DACGND = GNDREF, TA = 25C, unless otherwise noted. Table 10. Parameter AVDD to IOVDD AGND to DGND IOVDD to IOGND, AVDD to AGND Digital Input Voltage to IOGND Digital Output Voltage to IOGND VREF to AGND Analog Inputs to AGND Analog Outputs to AGND Operating Temperature Range, Industrial Storage Temperature Range Junction Temperature JA Thermal Impedance 40-Lead LFCSP 49-Ball CSP_BGA 64-Lead LFCSP 64-Ball CSP_BGA 64-Lead LQFP 80-Lead LQFP Peak Solder Reflow Temperature SnPb Assemblies (10 sec to 30 sec) RoHS Compliant Assemblies (20 sec to 40 sec) Rating -0.3 V to +0.3 V -0.3 V to +0.3 V -0.3 V to +6 V -0.3 V to +5.3 V -0.3 V to IOVDD + 0.3 V -0.3 V to AVDD + 0.3 V -0.3 V to AVDD + 0.3 V -0.3 V to AVDD + 0.3 V -40C to +125C -65C to +150C 150C Stresses at or above those listed under Absolute Maximum Ratings may cause permanent damage to the product. This is a stress rating only; functional operation of the product at these or any other conditions above those indicated in the operational section of this specification is not implied. Operation beyond the maximum operating conditions for extended periods may affect product reliability. Only one absolute maximum rating can be applied at any one time. ESD CAUTION 26C/W 80C/W 24C/W 75C/W 47C/W 38C/W 240C 260C Rev. G | Page 20 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 PIN CONFIGURATIONS AND FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 ADC2/CMP0 ADC1 ADC0 AVDD AGND VREF P4.2/PLAO[10] P1.0/T1/SPM0/PLAI[0] P1.1/SPM1/PLAI[1] P1.2/SPM2/PLAI[2] ADuC7019/ADuC7020/ADuC7021/ADuC7022 ADuC7019 TOP VIEW (Not to Scale) 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 P1.3/SPM3/PLAI[3] P1.4/SPM4/PLAI[4]/IRQ2 P1.5/SPM5/PLAI[5]/IRQ3 P1.6/SPM6/PLAI[6] P1.7/SPM7/PLAO[0] XCLKI XCLKO P0.7/ECLK/XCLK/SPM8/PLAO[4] P2.0/SPM9/PLAO[5]/CONVSTART IRQ1/P0.5/ADCBUSY/PLAO[2] NOTES 1. THE EXPOSED PAD MUST BE SOLDERED FOR MECHANICAL PURPOSES AND LEFT UNCONNECTED. 04955-064 P0.6/T1/MRST/PLAO[3] TCK TDO IOGND IOVDD LVDD DGND P0.3/TRST/ADC BUSY RST IRQ0/P0.4/PWMTRIP/PLAO[1] 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ADC3/CMP1 1 ADC4 2 GNDREF 3 DAC0/ADC12 4 DAC1/ADC13 5 DAC2/ADC14 6 DAC3/ADC15 7 TMS 8 TDI 9 BM/P0.0/CMPOUT/PLAI[7] 10 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 ADC2/CMP0 ADC1 ADC0 AVDD AGND VREF P4.2/PLAO[10] P1.0/T1/SPM0/PLAI[0] P1.1/SPM1/PLAI[1] P1.2/SPM2/PLAI[2] Figure 19. 40-Lead LFCSP_WQ Pin Configuration (ADuC7019) ADuC7020 TOP VIEW (Not to Scale) 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 P1.3/SPM3/PLAI[3] P1.4/SPM4/PLAI[4]/IRQ2 P1.5/SPM5/PLAI[5]/IRQ3 P1.6/SPM6/PLAI[6] P1.7/SPM7/PLAO[0] XCLKI XCLKO P0.7/ECLK/XCLK/SPM8/PLAO[4] P2.0/SPM9/PLAO[5]/CONVSTART IRQ1/P0.5/ADCBUSY/PLAO[2] NOTES 1. THE EXPOSED PAD MUST BE SOLDERED FOR MECHANICAL PURPOSES AND LEFT UNCONNECTED. Figure 20. 40-Lead LFCSP_WQ Pin Configuration (ADuC7020) Rev. G | Page 21 of 101 04955-090 P0.6/T1/MRST/PLAO[3] TCK TDO IOGND IOVDD LVDD DGND P0.3/TRST/ADC BUSY RST IRQ0/P0.4/PWMTRIP/PLAO[1] 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ADC3/CMP1 1 ADC4 2 GNDREF 3 DAC0/ADC12 4 DAC1/ADC13 5 DAC2/ADC14 6 DAC3/ADC15 7 TMS 8 TDI 9 BM/P0.0/CMPOUT/PLAI[7] 10 Data Sheet 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 ADC3/CMP1 ADC2/CMP0 ADC1 ADC0 AVDD AGND VREF P1.0/T1/SPM0/PLAI[0] P1.1/SPM1/PLAI[1] P1.2/SPM2/PLAI[2] ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 ADuC7021 TOP VIEW (Not to Scale) 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 P1.3/SPM3/PLAI[3] P1.4/SPM4/PLAI[4]/IRQ2 P1.5/SPM5/PLAI[5]/IRQ3 P1.6/SPM6/PLAI[6] P1.7/SPM7/PLAO[0] XCLKI XCLKO P0.7/ECLK/XCLK/SPM8/PLAO[4] P2.0/SPM9/PLAO[5]/CONVSTART IRQ1/P0.5/ADCBUSY/PLAO[2] NOTES 1. THE EXPOSED PAD MUST BE SOLDERED FOR MECHANICAL PURPOSES AND LEFT UNCONNECTED. 04955-065 P0.6/T1/MRST/PLAO[3] TCK TDO IOGND IOVDD LVDD DGND P0.3/TRST/ADC BUSY RST IRQ0/P0.4/PWMTRIP/PLAO[1] 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ADC4 1 ADC5 2 ADC6 3 ADC7 4 GNDREF 5 DAC0/ADC12 6 DAC1/ADC13 7 TMS 8 TDI 9 BM/P0.0/CMPOUT/PLAI[7] 10 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 ADC4 ADC3/CMP1 ADC2/CMP0 ADC1 ADC0 AVDD AGND VREF P1.0/T1/SPM0/PLAI[0] P1.1/SPM1/PLAI[1] Figure 21. 40-Lead LFCSP_WQ Pin Configuration (ADuC7021) ADuC7022 TOP VIEW (Not to Scale) 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 P1.2/SPM2/PLAI[2] P1.3/SPM3/PLAI[3] P1.4/SPM4/PLAI[4]/IRQ2 P1.5/SPM5/PLAI[5]/IRQ3 P1.6/SPM6/PLAI[6] P1.7/SPM7/PLAO[0] XCLKI XCLKO P0.7/ECLK/XCLK/SPM8/PLAO[4] P2.0/SPM9/PLAO[5]/CONVSTART NOTES 1. THE EXPOSED PAD MUST BE SOLDERED FOR MECHANICAL PURPOSES AND LEFT UNCONNECTED. Figure 22. 40-Lead LFCSP_WQ Pin Configuration (ADuC7022) Rev. G | Page 22 of 101 04955-066 TCK TDO IOGND IOVDD LVDD DGND P0.3/TRST/ADC BUSY RST IRQ0/P0.4/PWMTRIP/PLAO[1] IRQ1/P0.5/ADCBUSY/PLAO[2] 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ADC5 1 ADC6 2 ADC7 3 ADC8 4 ADC9 5 GNDREF 6 TMS 7 TDI 8 BM/P0.0/CMPOUT/PLAI[7] 9 P0.6/T1/MRST/PLAO[3] 10 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Table 11. Pin Function Descriptions (ADuC7019/ADuC7020/ADuC7021/ADuC7022) Pin No. 7019/7020 7021 38 37 39 38 40 39 1 40 7022 36 37 38 39 Mnemonic ADC0 ADC1 ADC2/CMP0 ADC3/CMP1 2 1 2 40 1 ADC4 ADC5 Description Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 0. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 1. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 2/Comparator Positive Input. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 3 (Buffered Input on ADuC7019)/ Comparator Negative Input. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 4. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 5. 3 2 ADC6 Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 6. 4 3 ADC7 Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 7. 4 ADC8 Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 8. 3 5 5 ADC9 Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 9. 6 GNDREF 4 6 DAC0/ADC12 Ground Voltage Reference for the ADC. For optimal performance, the analog power supply should be separated from IOGND and DGND. DAC0 Voltage Output/Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 12. 5 7 DAC1/ADC13 DAC1 Voltage Output/Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 13. 6 DAC2/ADC14 DAC2 Voltage Output/Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 14. 7 DAC3/ADC15 8 8 7 TMS 9 10 9 10 8 9 TDI BM/P0.0/CMPOUT/PLAI[7] 11 11 10 P0.6/T1/MRST/PLAO[3] 12 12 11 TCK 13 14 15 13 14 15 12 13 14 TDO IOGND IOVDD 16 16 15 LVDD 17 18 17 18 16 17 DGND P0.3/TRST/ADCBUSY 19 20 19 20 18 19 RST IRQ0/P0.4/PWMTRIP/PLAO[1] 21 21 20 IRQ1/P0.5/ADCBUSY/PLAO[2] DAC3 Voltage Output on ADuC7020. On the ADuC7019, a 10 nF capacitor must be connected between this pin and AGND/Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 15 (see Figure 53). Test Mode Select, JTAG Test Port Input. Debug and download access. This pin has an internal pull-up resistor to IOVDD. In some cases, an external pull-up resistor (~100K) is also required to ensure that the part does not enter an erroneous state. Test Data In, JTAG Test Port Input. Debug and download access. Multifunction I/O Pin. Boot Mode (BM). The ADuC7019/20/21/22 enter serial download mode if BM is low at reset and execute code if BM is pulled high at reset through a 1 k resistor/General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.0/Voltage Comparator Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 7. Multifunction Pin. Driven low after reset. General-Purpose Output Port 0.6/ Timer1 Input/Power-On Reset Output/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 3. Test Clock, JTAG Test Port Input. Debug and download access. This pin has an internal pull-up resistor to IOVDD. In some cases an external pull-up resistor (~100K) is also required to ensure that the part does not enter an erroneous state. Test Data Out, JTAG Test Port Output. Debug and download access. Ground for GPIO (see Table 78). Typically connected to DGND. 3.3 V Supply for GPIO (see Table 78) and Input of the On-Chip Voltage Regulator. 2.6 V Output of the On-Chip Voltage Regulator. This output must be connected to a 0.47 F capacitor to DGND only. Ground for Core Logic. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.3/Test Reset, JTAG Test Port Input/ ADCBUSY Signal Output. Reset Input, Active Low. Multifunction I/O Pin. External Interrupt Request 0, Active High/GeneralPurpose Input and Output Port 0.4/PWM Trip External Input/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 1. Multifunction I/O Pin. External Interrupt Request 1, Active High/GeneralPurpose Input and Output Port 0.5/ADCBUSY Signal Output/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 2. Rev. G | Page 23 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Pin No. 7019/7020 7021 22 22 7022 21 Mnemonic P2.0/SPM9/PLAO[5]/CONVSTART 23 23 22 P0.7/ECLK/XCLK/SPM8/PLAO[4] 24 25 24 25 23 24 XCLKO XCLKI 26 26 25 P1.7/SPM7/PLAO[0] 27 27 26 P1.6/SPM6/PLAI[6] 28 28 27 P1.5/SPM5/PLAI[5]/IRQ3 29 29 28 P1.4/SPM4/PLAI[4]/IRQ2 30 30 29 P1.3/SPM3/PLAI[3] 31 31 30 P1.2/SPM2/PLAI[2] 32 32 31 P1.1/SPM1/PLAI[1] 33 33 32 P1.0/T1/SPM0/PLAI[0] 34 P4.2/PLAO[10] 35 34 33 VREF 36 37 0 35 36 0 34 35 0 AGND AVDD EP Data Sheet Description Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 2.0/UART/ Programmable Logic Array Output Element 5/Start Conversion Input Signal for ADC. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.7/ Output for External Clock Signal/Input to the Internal Clock Generator Circuits/UART/ Programmable Logic Array Output Element 4. Output from the Crystal Oscillator Inverter. Input to the Crystal Oscillator Inverter and Input to the Internal Clock Generator Circuits. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.7/UART, SPI/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 0. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.6/UART, SPI/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 6. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.5/UART, SPI/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 5/External Interrupt Request 3, Active High. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.4/UART, SPI/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 4/External Interrupt Request 2, Active High. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.3/UART, I2C1/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 3. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.2/UART, I2C1/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 2. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.1/UART, I2C0/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 1. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.0/ Timer1 Input/UART, I2C0/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 0. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.2/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 10. 2.5 V Internal Voltage Reference. Must be connected to a 0.47 F capacitor when using the internal reference. Analog Ground. Ground reference point for the analog circuitry. 3.3 V Analog Power. Exposed Pad. The pin configuration for the ADuC7019/ADuC7020/ ADuC7021/ADuC7022 has an exposed pad that must be soldered for mechanical purposes and left unconnected. Rev. G | Page 24 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 ADC3/CMP1 ADC2/CMP0 ADC1 ADC0 DACV DD AVDD AGND DACGND DAC REF VREF P4.5/PLAO[13] P4.4/PLAO[12] P4.3/PLAO[11] P4.2/PLAO[10] P1.0/T1/SPM0/PLAI[0] P1.1/SPM1/PLAI[1] ADuC7024/ADuC7025 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PIN 1 INDICATOR ADuC7024/ ADuC7025 TOP VIEW (Not to Scale) 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 P1.2/SPM2/PLAI[2] P1.3/SPM3/PLAI[3] P1.4/SPM4/PLAI[4]/IRQ2 P1.5/SPM5/PLAI[5]/IRQ3 P4.1/PLAO[9] P4.0/PLAO[8] IOVDD IOGND P1.6/SPM6/PLAI[6] P1.7/SPM7/PLAO[0] P3.7/PWMSYNC/PLAI[15] P3.6/PWMTRIP/PLAI[14] XCLKI XCLKO P0.7/ECLK/XCLK/SPM8/PLAO[4] P2.0/SPM9/PLAO[5]/CONVSTART NOTES 1. THE EXPOSED PAD MUST BE SOLDERED FOR MECHANICAL PURPOSES AND LEFT UNCONNECTED. 04955-067 TCK TDO IOGND IOVDD LVDD DGND P3.0/PWM0H/PLAI[8] P3.1/PWM0L/PLAI[9] P3.2/PWM1H/PLAI[10] P3.3/PWM1L/PLAI[11] P0.3/TRST/ADC BUSY RST P3.4/PWM2H/PLAI[12] P3.5/PWM2L/PLAI[13] IRQ0/P0.4/PWMTRIP/PLAO[1] IRQ1/P0.5/ADCBUSY/PLAO[2] 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 ADC4 ADC5 ADC6 ADC7 ADC8 ADC9 GNDREF ADCNEG DAC0/ADC12 DAC1/ADC13 TMS TDI P4.6/PLAO[14] P4.7/PLAO[15] BM/P0.0/CMPOUT/PLAI[7] P0.6/T1/MRST/PLAO[3] 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 ADC3/CMP1 ADC2/CMP0 ADC1 ADC0 DACV DD AVDD AGND DACGND DAC REF VREF P4.5/PLAO[13] P4.4/PLAO[12] P4.3/PLAO[11] P4.2/PLAO[10] P1.0/T1/SPM0/PLAI[0] P1.1/SPM1/PLAI[1] Figure 23. 64-Lead LFCSP_VQ Pin Configuration (ADuC7024/ADuC7025) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PIN 1 INDICATOR ADuC7024/ ADuC7025 TOP VIEW (Not to Scale) 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 P1.2/SPM2/PLAI[2] P1.3/SPM3/PLAI[3] P1.4/SPM4/PLAI[4]/IRQ2 P1.5/SPM5/PLAI[5]/IRQ3 P4.1/PLAO[9] P4.0/PLAO[8] IOVDD IOGND P1.6/SPM6/PLAI[6] P1.7/SPM7/PLAO[0] P3.7/PWMSYNC/PLAI[15] P3.6/PWMTRIP/PLAI[14] XCLKI XCLKO P0.7/ECLK/XCLK/SPM8/PLAO[4] P2.0/SPM9/PLAO[5]/CONVSTART Figure 24. 64-Lead LQFP Pin Configuration (ADuC7024/ADuC7025) Rev. G | Page 25 of 101 04955-068 TCK TDO IOGND IOVDD LVDD DGND P3.0/PWM0H/PLAI[8] P3.1/PWM0L/PLAI[9] P3.2/PWM1H/PLAI[10] P3.3/PWM1L/PLAI[11] P0.3/TRST/ADC BUSY RST P3.4/PWM2H/PLAI[12] P3.5/PWM2L/PLAI[13] IRQ0/P0.4/PWMTRIP/PLAO[1] IRQ1/P0.5/ADCBUSY/PLAO[2] 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 ADC4 ADC5 ADC6 ADC7 ADC8 ADC9 GNDREF ADCNEG DAC0/ADC12 DAC1/ADC13 TMS TDI P4.6/PLAO[14] P4.7/PLAO[15] BM/P0.0/CMPOUT/PLAI[7] P0.6/T1/MRST/PLAO[3] ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet Table 12. Pin Function Descriptions (ADuC7024/ADuC7025 64-Lead LFCSP_VQ and 64-Lead LQFP) Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Mnemonic ADC4 ADC5 ADC6 ADC7 ADC8 ADC9 GNDREF 8 ADCNEG 9 DAC0/ADC12 10 DAC1/ADC13 11 12 13 14 15 TMS TDI P4.6/PLAO[14] P4.7/PLAO[15] BM/P0.0/CMPOUT/PLAI[7] 16 P0.6/T1/MRST/PLAO[3] 17 18 19 20 21 TCK TDO IOGND IOVDD LVDD 22 23 DGND P3.0/PWM0H/PLAI[8] 24 P3.1/PWM0L/PLAI[9] 25 P3.2/PWM1H/PLAI[10] 26 P3.3/PWM1L/PLAI[11] 27 28 29 P0.3/TRST/ADCBUSY RST P3.4/PWM2H/PLAI[12] 30 P3.5/PWM2L/PLAI[13] 31 IRQ0/P0.4/PWMTRIP/PLAO[1] 32 IRQ1/P0.5/ADCBUSY/PLAO[2] 33 P2.0/SPM9/PLAO[5]/CONVSTART 34 P0.7/ECLK/XCLK/SPM8/PLAO[4] 35 36 XCLKO XCLKI Description Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 4. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 5. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 6. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 7. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 8. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 9. Ground Voltage Reference for the ADC. For optimal performance, the analog power supply should be separated from IOGND and DGND. Bias Point or Negative Analog Input of the ADC in Pseudo Differential Mode. Must be connected to the ground of the signal to convert. This bias point must be between 0 V and 1 V. DAC0 Voltage Output/Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 12. DAC outputs are not present on the ADuC7025. DAC1 Voltage Output/Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 13. DAC outputs are not present on the ADuC7025. JTAG Test Port Input, Test Mode Select. Debug and download access. JTAG Test Port Input, Test Data In. Debug and download access General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.6/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 14. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.7/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 15. Multifunction I/O Pin. Boot mode. The ADuC7024/ADuC7025 enter download mode if BM is low at reset and execute code if BM is pulled high at reset through a 1 k resistor/General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.0/Voltage Comparator Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 7. Multifunction Pin, Driven Low After Reset. General-Purpose Output Port 0.6/Timer1 Input/PowerOn Reset Output/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 3. JTAG Test Port Input, Test Clock. Debug and download access. JTAG Test Port Output, Test Data Out. Debug and download access. Ground for GPIO (see Table 78). Typically connected to DGND. 3.3 V Supply for GPIO (see Table 78) and Input of the On-Chip Voltage Regulator. 2.6 V Output of the On-Chip Voltage Regulator. This output must be connected to a 0.47 F capacitor to DGND only. Ground for Core Logic. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.0/PWM Phase 0 High-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 8. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.1/PWM Phase 0 Low-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 9. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.2/PWM Phase 1 High-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 10. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.3/PWM Phase 1 Low-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 11. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.3/JTAG Test Port Input, Test Reset/ADCBUSY Signal Output. Reset Input, Active Low. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.4/PWM Phase 2 High-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input 12. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.5/PWM Phase 2 Low-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 13. Multifunction I/O Pin. External Interrupt Request 0, Active High/General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.4/PWM Trip External Input/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 1. Multifunction I/O Pin. External Interrupt Request 1, Active High/General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.5/ADCBUSY Signal Output/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 2. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 2.0/UART/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 5/Start Conversion Input Signal for ADC. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.7/Output for External Clock Signal/Input to the Internal Clock Generator Circuits/UART/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 4. Output from the Crystal Oscillator Inverter. Input to the Crystal Oscillator Inverter and Input to the Internal Clock Generator Circuits. Rev. G | Page 26 of 101 Data Sheet Pin No. 37 Mnemonic P3.6/PWMTRIP/PLAI[14] 38 P3.7/PWMSYNC/PLAI[15] 39 P1.7/SPM7/PLAO[0] 40 P1.6/SPM6/PLAI[6] 41 42 43 44 45 IOGND IOVDD P4.0/PLAO[8] P4.1/PLAO[9] P1.5/SPM5/PLAI[5]/IRQ3 46 P1.4/SPM4/PLAI[4]/IRQ2 47 P1.3/SPM3/PLAI[3] 48 P1.2/SPM2/PLAI[2] 49 P1.1/SPM1/PLAI[1] 50 P1.0/T1/SPM0/PLAI[0] 51 52 53 54 55 P4.2/PLAO[10] P4.3/PLAO[11] P4.4/PLAO[12] P4.5/PLAO[13] VREF 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 0 DACREF DACGND AGND AVDD DACVDD ADC0 ADC1 ADC2/CMP0 ADC3/CMP1 EP ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Description General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.6/PWM Safety Cutoff/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 14. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.7/PWM Synchronization Input and Output/ Programmable Logic Array Input Element 15. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.7/UART, SPI/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 0. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.6/UART, SPI/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 6. Ground for GPIO (see Table 78). Typically connected to DGND. 3.3 V Supply for GPIO (see Table 78) and Input of the On-Chip Voltage Regulator. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.0/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 8. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.1/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 9. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.5/UART, SPI/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 5/External Interrupt Request 3, Active High. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.4/UART, SPI/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 4/External Interrupt Request 2, Active High. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.3/UART, I2C1/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 3. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.2/UART, I2C1/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 2. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.1/UART, I2C0/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 1. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.0/Timer1 Input/UART, I2C0/ Programmable Logic Array Input Element 0. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.2/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 10. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.3/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 11. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.4/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 12. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.5/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 13. 2.5 V Internal Voltage Reference. Must be connected to a 0.47 F capacitor when using the internal reference. External Voltage Reference for the DACs. Range: DACGND to DACVDD. Ground for the DAC. Typically connected to AGND. Analog Ground. Ground reference point for the analog circuitry. 3.3 V Analog Power. 3.3 V Power Supply for the DACs. Must be connected to AVDD. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 0. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 1. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 2/Comparator Positive Input. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 3/Comparator Negative Input. Exposed Pad. The pin configuration for the ADuC7024/ADuC7025 LFCSP_VQ has an exposed pad that must be soldered for mechanical purposes and left unconnected. Rev. G | Page 27 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 ADC3/CMP1 ADC2/CMP0 ADC1 ADC0 ADC11 DACV DD AVDD AVDD AGND AGND DACGND DACREF VREF REFGND P4.5/AD13/PLAO[13] P4.4/AD12/PLAO[12] P4.3/AD11/PLAO[11] P4.2/AD10/PLAO[10] P1.0/T1/SPM0/PLAI[0] P1.1/SPM1/PLAI[1] ADuC7026/ADuC7027 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 PIN 1 INDICATOR ADuC7026/ ADuC7027 TOP VIEW (Not to Scale) 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 P1.2/SPM2/PLAI[2] P1.3/SPM3/PLAI[3] P1.4/SPM4/PLAI[4]/IRQ2 P1.5/SPM5/PLAI[5]/IRQ3 P4.1/AD9/PLAO[9] P4.0/AD8/PLAO[8] IOVDD IOGND P1.6/SPM6/PLAI[6] P1.7/SPM7/PLAO[0] P2.2/RS/PWM0L/PLAO[7] P2.1/WS/PWM0H/PLAO[6] P2.7/PWM1L/MS3 P3.7/AD7/PWMSYNC /PLAI[15] P3.6/AD6/PWMTRIP/PLAI[14] XCLKI XCLKO P0.7/ECLK/XCLK/SPM8/PLAO[4] P2.0/SPM9/PLAO[5]/CONVSTART IRQ1/P0.5/ADCBUSY /PLAO[2]/MS2 04955-069 P0.6/T1/MRST/PLAO[3] TCK TDO P0.2/PWM2L/BHE IOGND IOVDD LVDD DGND P3.0/AD0/PWM0H/PLAI[8] P3.1/AD1/PWM0L/PLAI[9] P3.2/AD2/PWM1H/PLAI[10] P3.3/AD3/PWM1L/PLAI[11] P2.4/PWM0H/MS0 P0.3/TRST/A16/ADCBUSY P2.5/PWM0L/MS1 P2.6/PWM1H/MS2 RST P3.4/AD4/PWM2H/PLAI[12] P3.5/AD5/PWM2L/PLAI[13] IRQ0/P0.4/PWMTRIP/PLAO[1]/MS1 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 ADC4 ADC5 ADC6 ADC7 ADC8 ADC9 ADC10 GNDREF ADCNEG DAC0/ADC12 DAC1/ADC13 DAC2/ADC14 DAC3/ADC15 TMS TDI P0.1/PWM2H/BLE P2.3/AE P4.6/AD14/PLAO[14] P4.7/AD15/PLAO[15] BM/P0.0/CMPOUT/PLAI[7]/MS0 Figure 25. 80-Lead LQFP Pin Configuration (ADuC7026/ADuC7027) Table 13. Pin Function Descriptions (ADuC7026/ADuC7027) Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Mnemonic ADC4 ADC5 ADC6 ADC7 ADC8 ADC9 ADC10 GNDREF 9 ADCNEG 10 DAC0/ADC12 11 DAC1/ADC13 12 DAC2/ADC14 13 DAC3/ADC15 14 15 16 TMS TDI P0.1/PWM2H/BLE 17 P2.3/AE Description Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 4. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 5. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 6. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 7. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 8. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 9. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 10. Ground Voltage Reference for the ADC. For optimal performance, the analog power supply should be separated from IOGND and DGND. Bias Point or Negative Analog Input of the ADC in Pseudo Differential Mode. Must be connected to the ground of the signal to convert. This bias point must be between 0 V and 1 V. DAC0 Voltage Output/Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 12. DAC outputs are not present on the ADuC7027. DAC1 Voltage Output/Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 13. DAC outputs are not present on the ADuC7027. DAC2 Voltage Output/Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 14. DAC outputs are not present on the ADuC7027. DAC3 Voltage Output/Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 15. DAC outputs are not present on the ADuC7027. JTAG Test Port Input, Test Mode Select. Debug and download access. JTAG Test Port Input, Test Data In. Debug and download access. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.1/PWM Phase 2 High-Side Output/External Memory Byte Low Enable. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 2.3/External Memory Access Enable. Rev. G | Page 28 of 101 Data Sheet Pin No. 18 Mnemonic P4.6/AD14/PLAO[14] 19 P4.7/AD15/PLAO[15] 20 BM/P0.0/CMPOUT/PLAI[7]/MS0 21 P0.6/T1/MRST/PLAO[3] 22 23 24 TCK TDO P0.2/PWM2L/BHE 25 26 27 IOGND IOVDD LVDD 28 29 DGND P3.0/AD0/PWM0H/PLAI[8] 30 P3.1/AD1/PWM0L/PLAI[9] 31 P3.2/AD2/PWM1H/PLAI[10] 32 P3.3/AD3/PWM1L/PLAI[11] 33 P2.4/PWM0H/MS0 34 35 P0.3/TRST/A16/ADCBUSY P2.5/PWM0L/MS1 36 P2.6/PWM1H/MS2 37 38 RST P3.4/AD4/PWM2H/PLAI[12] 39 P3.5/AD5/PWM2L/PLAI[13] 40 IRQ0/P0.4/PWMTRIP/PLAO[1]/MS1 41 IRQ1/P0.5/ADCBUSY/PLAO[2]/MS2 42 P2.0/SPM9/PLAO[5]/CONVSTART 43 P0.7/ECLK/XCLK/SPM8/PLAO[4] 44 45 XCLKO XCLKI ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Description General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.6/External Memory Interface/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 14. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.7/External Memory Interface/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 15. Multifunction I/O Pin. Boot Mode. The ADuC7026/ADuC7027 enter UART download mode if BM is low at reset and execute code if BM is pulled high at reset through a 1 k resistor/GeneralPurpose Input and Output Port 0.0/Voltage Comparator Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 7/External Memory Select 0. Multifunction Pin, Driven Low After Reset. General-Purpose Output Port 0.6/Timer1 Input/ Power-On Reset Output/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 3. JTAG Test Port Input, Test Clock. Debug and download access. JTAG Test Port Output, Test Data Out. Debug and download access. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.2/PWM Phase 2 Low-Side Output/External Memory Byte High Enable. Ground for GPIO (see Table 78). Typically connected to DGND. 3.3 V Supply for GPIO (see Table 78) and Input of the On-Chip Voltage Regulator. 2.6 V Output of the On-Chip Voltage Regulator. This output must be connected to a 0.47 F capacitor to DGND only. Ground for Core Logic. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.0/External Memory Interface/PWM Phase 0 High-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 8. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.1/External Memory Interface/PWM Phase 0 Low-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 9. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.2/External Memory Interface/PWM Phase 1 High-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 10. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.3/External Memory Interface/PWM Phase 1 Low-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 11. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 2.4/PWM Phase 0 High-Side Output/External Memory Select 0. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.3/JTAG Test Port Input, Test Reset/ADCBUSY Signal Output. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 2.5/PWM Phase 0 Low-Side Output/External Memory Select 1. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 2.6/PWM Phase 1 High-Side Output/External Memory Select 2. Reset Input, Active Low. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.4/External Memory Interface/PWM Phase 2 High-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input 12. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.5/External Memory Interface/PWM Phase 2 Low-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 13. Multifunction I/O Pin. External Interrupt Request 0, Active High/General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.4/PWM Trip External Input/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 1/ External Memory Select 1. Multifunction I/O Pin. External Interrupt Request 1, Active High/General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.5/ADCBUSY Signal Output/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 2/External Memory Select 2. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 2.0/UART/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 5/Start Conversion Input Signal for ADC. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.7/Output for External Clock Signal/Input to the Internal Clock Generator Circuits/UART/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 4. Output from the Crystal Oscillator Inverter. Input to the Crystal Oscillator Inverter and Input to the Internal Clock Generator Circuits. Rev. G | Page 29 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Pin No. 46 Mnemonic P3.6/AD6/PWMTRIP/PLAI[14] 47 P3.7/AD7/PWMSYNC/PLAI[15] 48 P2.7/PWM1L/MS3 49 P2.1/WS/PWM0H/PLAO[6] 50 P2.2/RS/PWM0L/PLAO[7] 51 P1.7/SPM7/PLAO[0] 52 P1.6/SPM6/PLAI[6] 53 54 55 IOGND IOVDD P4.0/AD8/PLAO[8] 56 P4.1/AD9/PLAO[9] 57 P1.5/SPM5/PLAI[5]/IRQ3 58 P1.4/SPM4/PLAI[4]/IRQ2 59 P1.3/SPM3/PLAI[3] 60 P1.2/SPM2/PLAI[2] 61 P1.1/SPM1/PLAI[1] 62 P1.0/T1/SPM0/PLAI[0] 63 P4.2/AD10/PLAO[10] 64 P4.3/AD11/PLAO[11] 65 P4.4/AD12/PLAO[12] 66 P4.5/AD13/PLAO[13] 67 68 REFGND VREF 69 70 71, 72 73, 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 DACREF DACGND AGND AVDD DACVDD ADC11 ADC0 ADC1 ADC2/CMP0 ADC3/CMP1 Data Sheet Description General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.6/External Memory Interface/PWM Safety Cutoff/ Programmable Logic Array Input Element 14. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.7/External Memory Interface/PWM Synchronization/ Programmable Logic Array Input Element 15. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 2.7/PWM Phase 1 Low-Side Output/External Memory Select 3. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 2.1/External Memory Write Strobe/PWM Phase 0 HighSide Output/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 6. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 2.2/External Memory Read Strobe/PWM Phase 0 LowSide Output/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 7. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.7/UART, SPI/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 0. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.6/UART, SPI/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 6. Ground for GPIO (see Table 78). Typically connected to DGND. 3.3 V Supply for GPIO (see Table 78) and Input of the On-Chip Voltage Regulator. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.0/External Memory Interface/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 8. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.1/External Memory Interface/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 9. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.5/UART, SPI/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 5/External Interrupt Request 3, Active High. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.4/UART, SPI/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 4/External Interrupt Request 2, Active High. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.3/UART, I2C1/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 3. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.2/UART, I2C1/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 2. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.1/UART, I2C0/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 1. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.0/Timer1 Input/UART, I2C0/ Programmable Logic Array Input Element 0. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.2/External Memory Interface/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 10. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.3/External Memory Interface/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 11. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.4/External Memory Interface/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 12. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.5/External Memory Interface/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 13. Ground for the Reference. Typically connected to AGND. 2.5 V Internal Voltage Reference. Must be connected to a 0.47 F capacitor when using the internal reference. External Voltage Reference for the DACs. Range: DACGND to DACVDD. Ground for the DAC. Typically connected to AGND. Analog Ground. Ground reference point for the analog circuitry. 3.3 V Analog Power. 3.3 V Power Supply for the DACs. Must be connected to AVDD. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 11. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 0. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 1. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 2/Comparator Positive Input. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 3/Comparator Negative Input. Rev. G | Page 30 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 ADUC7028 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 A B C D E F H BOTTOM VIEW (Not to Scale) 04955-086 G Figure 26. 64-Ball CSP_BGA Pin Configuration (ADuC7028) Table 14. Pin Function Descriptions (ADuC7028) Pin No. A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 Mnemonic ADC3/CMP1 DACVDD AVDD AGND DACGND P4.2/PLAO[10] P1.1/SPM1/PLAI[1] A8 P1.2/SPM2/PLAI[2] B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 ADC4 ADC2/CMP0 ADC1 DACREF VREF B6 P1.0/T1/SPM0/PLAI[0] B7 P1.4/SPM4/PLAI[4]/IRQ2 B8 P1.3/SPM3/PLAI[3] C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 D1 ADC6 ADC5 ADC0 P4.5/PLAO[13] P4.3/PLAO[11] P4.0/PLAO[8] P4.1/PLAO[9] IOGND ADCNEG D2 GNDREF D3 D4 D5 ADC7 P4.4/PLAO[12] P3.6/PWMTRIP/PLAI[14] D6 P1.7/SPM7/PLAO[0] Description Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 3/Comparator Negative Input. 3.3 V Power Supply for the DACs. Must be connected to AVDD. 3.3 V Analog Power. Analog Ground. Ground reference point for the analog circuitry. Ground for the DAC. Typically connected to AGND. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.2/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 10. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.1/UART, I2C0/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 1. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.2/UART, I2C1/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 2. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 4. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 2/Comparator Positive Input. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 1. External Voltage Reference for the DACs. Range: DACGND to DACVDD. 2.5 V Internal Voltage Reference. Must be connected to a 0.47 F capacitor when using the internal reference. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.0/Timer1 Input/UART, I2C0/ Programmable Logic Array Input Element 0. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.4/UART, SPI/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 4/External Interrupt Request 2, Active High. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.3/UART, I2C1/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 3. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 6. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 5. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 0. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.5/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 13. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.3/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 11. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.0/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 8. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.1/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 9. Ground for GPIO (see Table 78). Typically connected to DGND. Bias Point or Negative Analog Input of the ADC in Pseudo Differential Mode. Must be connected to the ground of the signal to convert. This bias point must be between 0 V and 1 V. Ground Voltage Reference for the ADC. For optimal performance, the analog power supply should be separated from IOGND and DGND. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 7. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.4/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 12. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.6/PWM Safety Cutoff/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 14. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.7/UART, SPI/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 0. Rev. G | Page 31 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Pin No. D7 Mnemonic P1.6/SPM6/PLAI[6] D8 E1 E2 E3 E4 IOVDD DAC3/ADC15 DAC2/ADC14 DAC1/ADC13 P3.0/PWM0H/PLAI[8] E5 P3.2/PWM1H/PLAI[10] E6 P1.5/SPM5/PLAI[5]/IRQ3 E7 P3.7/PWMSYNC/PLAI[15] E8 F1 F2 XCLKI P4.6/PLAO[14] TDI F3 F4 DAC0/ADC12 P3.1/PWM0L/PLAI[9] F5 P3.3/PWM1L/PLAI[11] F6 F7 RST P0.7/ECLK/XCLK/SPM8/PLAO[4] F8 G1 XCLKO BM/P0.0/CMPOUT/PLAI[7] G2 G3 G4 G5 P4.7/PLAO[15] TMS TDO P0.3/TRST/ADCBUSY G6 P3.4/PWM2H/PLAI[12] G7 P3.5/PWM2L/PLAI[13] G8 P2.0/SPM9/PLAO[5]/CONVSTART H1 P0.6/T1/MRST/PLAO[3] H2 H3 H4 H5 TCK IOGND IOVDD LVDD H6 H7 DGND IRQ0/P0.4/PWMTRIP/PLAO[1] H8 IRQ1/P0.5/ADCBUSY/PLAO[2] Data Sheet Description Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.6/UART, SPI/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 6. 3.3 V Supply for GPIO (see Table 78) and Input of the On-Chip Voltage Regulator. DAC3 Voltage Output/ADC Input 15. DAC2 Voltage Output/ADC Input 14. DAC1 Voltage Output/ADC Input 13. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.0/PWM Phase 0 High-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 8. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.2/PWM Phase 1 High-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 10. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.5/UART, SPI/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 5/External Interrupt Request 3, Active High. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.7/PWM Synchronization/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 15. Input to the Crystal Oscillator Inverter and Input to the Internal Clock Generator Circuits. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.6/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 14. JTAG Test Port Input, Test Data In. Debug and download access. DAC0 Voltage Output/ADC Input 12. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.1/PWM Phase 0 Low-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 9. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.3/PWM Phase 1 Low-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 11. Reset Input, Active Low. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.7/Output for External Clock Signal/Input to the Internal Clock Generator Circuits/UART/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 4. Output from the Crystal Oscillator Inverter. Multifunction I/O Pin. Boot mode. The ADuC7028 enters UART download mode if BM is low at reset and executes code if BM is pulled high at reset through a 1 k resistor/GeneralPurpose Input and Output Port 0.0/Voltage Comparator Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 7. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 4.7/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 15. JTAG Test Port Input, Test Mode Select. Debug and download access. JTAG Test Port Output, Test Data Out. Debug and download access. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.3/JTAG Test Port Input, Test Reset/ADCBUSY Signal Output. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.4/PWM Phase 2 High-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input 12. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.5/PWM Phase 2 Low-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 13. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 2.0/UART/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 5/Start Conversion Input Signal for ADC. Multifunction Pin, Driven Low After Reset. General-Purpose Output Port 0.6/Timer1 Input/ Power-On Reset Output/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 3. JTAG Test Port Input, Test Clock. Debug and download access. Ground for GPIO (see Table 78). Typically connected to DGND. 3.3 V Supply for GPIO (see Table 78) and Input of the On-Chip Voltage Regulator. 2.6 V Output of the On-Chip Voltage Regulator. This output must be connected to a 0.47 F capacitor to DGND only. Ground for Core Logic. Multifunction I/O Pin. External Interrupt Request 0, Active High/General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.4/PWM Trip External Input/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 1. Multifunction I/O Pin. External Interrupt Request 1, Active High/General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.5/ADCBUSY Signal Output/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 2. Rev. G | Page 32 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 ADUC7029 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 A B C D E G BOTTOM VIEW (Not to Scale) 04955-088 F Figure 27. 49-Ball CSP_BGA Pin Configuration (ADuC7029) Table 15. Pin Function Descriptions (ADuC7029) Pin No. A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 Mnemonic ADC3/CMP1 ADC1 ADC0 AVDD VREF A6 P1.0/T1/SPM0/PLAI[0] A7 P1.1/SPM1/PLAI[1] B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 ADC6 ADC5 ADC4 AGND DACREF P1.4/SPM4/PLAI[4]/IRQ2 B7 P1.3/SPM3/PLAI[3] C1 GNDREF C2 C3 C4 C5 AGND ADC2/CMP0 IOGND P1.2/SPM2/PLAI[2] C6 P1.6/SPM6/PLAI[6] C7 P1.5/SPM5/PLAI[5]/IRQ3 D1 D2 D3 D4 DAC0/ADC12 DAC3/ADC15 DAC1/ADC13 P3.3/PWM1L/PLAI[11] D5 P3.4/PWM2H/PLAI[12] D6 P3.6/PWMTRIP/PLAI[14] D7 P1.7/SPM7/PLAO[0] Description Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 3/Comparator Negative Input. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 1. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 0. 3.3 V Analog Power. 2.5 V Internal Voltage Reference. Must be connected to a 0.47 F capacitor when using the internal reference. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.0/Timer1 Input/UART, I2C0/ Programmable Logic Array Input Element 0. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.1/UART, I2C0/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 1. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 6. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 5. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 4. Analog Ground. Ground reference point for the analog circuitry. External Voltage Reference for the DACs. Range: DACGND to DACVDD. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.4/UART, SPI/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 4/External Interrupt Request 2, Active High. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.3/UART, I2C1/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 3. Ground Voltage Reference for the ADC. For optimal performance, the analog power supply should be separated from IOGND and DGND. Analog Ground. Ground reference point for the analog circuitry. Single-Ended or Differential Analog Input 2/Comparator Positive Input. Ground for GPIO (see Table 78). Typically connected to DGND. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.2/UART, I2C1/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 2. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.6/UART, SPI/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 6. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.5/UART, SPI/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 5/External Interrupt Request 3, Active High. DAC0 Voltage Output/ADC Input 12. DAC3 Voltage Output/ADC Input 15. DAC1 Voltage Output/ADC Input 13. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.3/PWM Phase 1 Low-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 11. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.4/PWM Phase 2 High-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input 12. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.6/PWM Safety Cutoff/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 14. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 1.7/UART, SPI/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 0. Rev. G | Page 33 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Pin No. E1 E2 Mnemonic TMS BM/P0.0/CMPOUT/PLAI[7] E3 E4 E5 DAC2/ADC14 IOVDD P3.2/PWM1H/PLAI[10] E6 P3.5/PWM2L/PLAI[13] E7 P0.7/ECLK/XCLK/SPM8/PLAO[4] F1 F2 TDI P0.6/T1/MRST/PLAO[3] F3 F4 IOGND P3.1/PWM0L/PLAI[9] F5 P3.0/PWM0H/PLAI[8] F6 F7 RST P2.0/SPM9/PLAO[5]/CONVSTART G1 G2 G3 TCK TDO LVDD G4 G5 DGND P0.3/TRST/ADCBUSY G6 IRQ0/P0.4/PWMTRIP/PLAO[1] G7 IRQ1/P0.5/ADCBUSY/PLAO[2] Data Sheet Description JTAG Test Port Input, Test Mode Select. Debug and download access. Multifunction I/O Pin. Boot mode. The ADuC7029 enters UART download mode if BM is low at reset and executes code if BM is pulled high at reset through a 1 k resistor/GeneralPurpose Input and Output Port 0.0/Voltage Comparator Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 7. DAC2 Voltage Output/ADC Input 14. 3.3 V Supply for GPIO (see Table 78) and Input of the On-Chip Voltage Regulator. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.2/PWM Phase 1 High-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 10. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.5/PWM Phase 2 Low-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 13. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.7/Output for External Clock Signal/Input to the Internal Clock Generator Circuits/UART/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 4. JTAG Test Port Input, Test Data In. Debug and download access. Multifunction Pin, Driven Low After Reset. General-Purpose Output Port 0.6/Timer1 Input/ Power-On Reset Output/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 3. Ground for GPIO (see Table 78). Typically connected to DGND. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.1/PWM Phase 0 Low-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 9. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 3.0/PWM Phase 0 High-Side Output/Programmable Logic Array Input Element 8. Reset Input, Active Low. Serial Port Multiplexed. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 2.0/UART/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 5/Start Conversion Input Signal for ADC. JTAG Test Port Input, Test Clock. Debug and download access. JTAG Test Port Output, Test Data Out. Debug and download access. 2.6 V Output of the On-Chip Voltage Regulator. This output must be connected to a 0.47 F capacitor to DGND only. Ground for Core Logic. General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.3/JTAG Test Port Input, Test Reset/ADCBUSY Signal Output. Multifunction I/O Pin. External Interrupt Request 0, Active High/General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.4/PWM Trip External Input/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 1. Multifunction I/O Pin. External Interrupt Request 1, Active High/General-Purpose Input and Output Port 0.5/ADCBUSY Signal Output/Programmable Logic Array Output Element 2. Rev. G | Page 34 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 TYPICAL PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS 1.0 1.0 fS = 774kSPS 0.6 0.6 0.4 0.4 0.2 0.2 0 -0.2 -0.4 -0.4 -0.6 -0.6 04955-075 -0.2 -0.8 2000 ADC CODES 3000 -1.0 4000 0 Figure 28. Typical INL Error, fS = 774 kSPS 1.0 0.2 0.2 (LSB) 0.4 (LSB) 0.6 0.4 0 0 -0.2 -0.4 -0.4 -0.6 -0.6 04955-077 -0.2 -0.8 0 1000 2000 ADC CODES 3000 -0.8 -1.0 4000 0 Figure 29. Typical INL Error, fS = 1 MSPS 0 0.9 -0.1 0.8 WCN (LSB) (LSB) -0.6 0.4 -0.7 -0.9 0.1 2.0 2.5 EXTERNAL REFERENCE (V) 3.0 -1.0 Figure 30. Typical Worst-Case (Positive (WCP) and Negative (WCN)) INL Error vs. VREF, fS = 774 kSPS 0 1.0 -0.1 0.9 0.8 -0.3 0.7 -0.4 0.6 0.5 WCP -0.6 -0.8 0.2 1.5 4000 -0.5 04955-072 (LSB) -0.5 1.0 3000 WCN -0.3 WCP 0.5 0 2000 ADC CODES -0.2 -0.2 0.7 0.3 1000 Figure 32. Typical DNL Error, fS = 1 MSPS 1.0 0.6 4000 fS = 1MSPS 0.8 0.6 -1.0 3000 Figure 31. Typical DNL Error, fS = 774 kSPS fS = 1MSPS 0.8 2000 ADC CODES 04955-076 1.0 1000 0.4 -0.7 0.3 -0.8 0.2 -0.9 0.1 -1.0 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 EXTERNAL REFERENCE (V) 3.0 0 Figure 33. Typical Worst-Case (Positive (WCP )and Negative (WCN)) DNL Error vs. VREF, fS = 774 kSPS Rev. G | Page 35 of 101 (LSB) 1000 -0.8 04955-071 0 04955-074 0 -1.0 fS = 774kSPS 0.8 (LSB) (LSB) 0.8 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet 9000 75 8000 -76 70 -78 SNR 7000 65 60 SNR (dB) FREQUENCY 5000 4000 -82 THD 55 THD (dB) -80 6000 -84 3000 50 2000 1161 1162 BIN 40 1163 1.0 Figure 34. Code Histogram Plot, fs = 774 kSPS, VIN = 0.7 V 0 2.0 2.5 EXTERNAL REFERENCE (V) -88 3.0 Figure 37. Typical Dynamic Performance vs. VREF 1500 fS = 774kSPS, SNR = 69.3dB, THD = -80.8dB, PHSN = -83.4dB -20 1.5 04955-070 0 -86 45 04955-073 1000 1450 1400 -40 1350 1300 CODE (dB) -60 -80 1250 1200 -100 1150 -120 04955-078 0 100 FREQUENCY (kHz) -20 39.7 39.6 39.4 (mA) -60 -80 39.3 39.2 -120 39.1 -140 39.0 04955-079 -100 50 100 FREQUENCY (kHz) 150 100 39.8 39.5 0 50 Figure 38. On-Chip Temperature Sensor Voltage Output vs. Temperature -40 -160 0 TEMPERATURE (C) fS = 1MSPS, SNR = 70.4dB, THD = -77.2dB, PHSN = -78.9dB 0 (dB) 1000 -50 200 Figure 35. Dynamic Performance, fS = 774 kSPS 20 1050 150 200 Figure 36. Dynamic Performance, fS = 1 MSPS 38.9 04955-080 -160 04955-060 1100 -140 -40 0 25 85 TEMPERATURE (C) 125 Figure 39. Current Consumption vs. Temperature @ CD = 0 Rev. G | Page 36 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 12.05 1.4 12.00 1.2 11.95 1.0 11.90 0.8 (mA) (mA) 11.85 11.80 0.6 11.75 11.70 0.4 11.65 -40 0 25 85 TEMPERATURE (C) 0 125 Figure 40. Current Consumption vs. Temperature @ CD = 3 04955-083 11.55 0.2 04955-081 11.60 -40 0 25 85 TEMPERATURE (C) 125 Figure 42. Current Consumption vs. Temperature in Sleep Mode 7.85 37.4 7.80 37.2 7.75 37.0 (mA) 7.65 7.60 7.55 36.8 36.6 7.50 7.40 -40 0 25 85 TEMPERATURE (C) 125 Figure 41. Current Consumption vs. Temperature @ CD = 7 36.2 04955-084 36.4 7.45 04955-082 (mA) 7.70 62.25 125.00 250.00 500.00 SAMPLING FREQUENCY (kSPS) 1000.00 Figure 43. Current Consumption vs. Sampling Frequency Rev. G | Page 37 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet TERMINOLOGY ADC SPECIFICATIONS Integral Nonlinearity (INL) The maximum deviation of any code from a straight line passing through the endpoints of the ADC transfer function. The endpoints of the transfer function are zero scale, a point 1/2 LSB below the first code transition, and full scale, a point 1/2 LSB above the last code transition. Differential Nonlinearity (DNL) The difference between the measured and the ideal 1 LSB change between any two adjacent codes in the ADC. The ratio is dependent upon the number of quantization levels in the digitization process; the more levels, the smaller the quantization noise. The theoretical signal to (noise + distortion) ratio for an ideal N-bit converter with a sine wave input is given by Signal to (Noise + Distortion) = (6.02 N + 1.76) dB Thus, for a 12-bit converter, this is 74 dB. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) The ratio of the rms sum of the harmonics to the fundamental. DAC SPECIFICATIONS Offset Error The deviation of the first code transition (0000 . . . 000) to (0000 . . . 001) from the ideal, that is, +1/2 LSB. Relative Accuracy Otherwise known as endpoint linearity, relative accuracy is a measure of the maximum deviation from a straight line passing through the endpoints of the DAC transfer function. It is measured after adjusting for zero error and full-scale error. Gain Error The deviation of the last code transition from the ideal AIN voltage (full scale - 1.5 LSB) after the offset error has been adjusted out. Signal to (Noise + Distortion) Ratio (SINAD) The measured ratio of signal to (noise + distortion) at the output of the ADC. The signal is the rms amplitude of the fundamental. Noise is the rms sum of all nonfundamental signals up to half the sampling frequency (fS/2), excluding dc. Voltage Output Settling Time The amount of time it takes the output to settle to within a 1 LSB level for a full-scale input change. Rev. G | Page 38 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 OVERVIEW OF THE ARM7TDMI CORE The ARM7(R) core is a 32-bit reduced instruction set computer (RISC). It uses a single 32-bit bus for instruction and data. The length of the data can be eight bits, 16 bits, or 32 bits. The length of the instruction word is 32 bits. The ARM7TDMI is an ARM7 core with four additional features. T support for the thumb (16-bit) instruction set. D support for debug. M support for long multiplications. I includes the EmbeddedICE module to support embedded system debugging. THUMB MODE (T) An ARM instruction is 32 bits long. The ARM7TDMI processor supports a second instruction set that is compressed into 16 bits, called the thumb instruction set. Faster execution from 16-bit memory and greater code density can usually be achieved by using the thumb instruction set instead of the ARM instruction set, which makes the ARM7TDMI core particularly suitable for embedded applications. However, the thumb mode has two limitations. Thumb code typically requires more instructions for the same job. As a result, ARM code is usually best for maximizing the performance of time-critical code. The thumb instruction set does not include some of the instructions needed for exception handling, which automatically switches the core to ARM code for exception handling. See the ARM7TDMI user guide for details on the core architecture, the programming model, and both the ARM and ARM thumb instruction sets. LONG MULTIPLY (M) The ARM7TDMI instruction set includes four extra instructions that perform 32-bit by 32-bit multiplication with a 64-bit result, and 32-bit by 32-bit multiplication-accumulation (MAC) with a 64-bit result. These results are achieved in fewer cycles than required on a standard ARM7 core. ARM supports five types of exceptions and a privileged processing mode for each type. The five types of exceptions are Normal interrupt or IRQ, which is provided to service general-purpose interrupt handling of internal and external events. Fast interrupt or FIQ, which is provided to service data transfers or communication channels with low latency. FIQ has priority over IRQ. Memory abort. Attempted execution of an undefined instruction. Software interrupt instruction (SWI), which can be used to make a call to an operating system. Typically, the programmer defines interrupt as IRQ, but for higher priority interrupt, that is, faster response time, the programmer can define interrupt as FIQ. ARM REGISTERS ARM7TDMI has a total of 37 registers: 31 general-purpose registers and six status registers. Each operating mode has dedicated banked registers. When writing user-level programs, 15 general-purpose 32-bit registers (R0 to R14), the program counter (R15), and the current program status register (CPSR) are usable. The remaining registers are used for system-level programming and exception handling only. When an exception occurs, some of the standard registers are replaced with registers specific to the exception mode. All exception modes have replacement banked registers for the stack pointer (R13) and the link register (R14), as represented in Figure 44. The fast interrupt mode has more registers (R8 to R12) for fast interrupt processing. This means that interrupt processing can begin without the need to save or restore these registers and, thus, save critical time in the interrupt handling process. R0 USABLE IN USER MODE R1 SYSTEM MODES ONLY R2 R3 EmbeddedICE (I) R4 R5 EmbeddedICE provides integrated on-chip support for the core. The EmbeddedICE module contains the breakpoint and watchpoint registers that allow code to be halted for debugging purposes. These registers are controlled through the JTAG test port. R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 When a breakpoint or watchpoint is encountered, the processor halts and enters debug state. Once in a debug state, the processor registers can be inspected as well as the Flash/EE, SRAM, and memory mapped registers. R12 R13 R14 R8_FIQ R9_FIQ R10_FIQ R11_FIQ R12_FIQ R13_FIQ R14_FIQ R13_SVC R14_SVC R13_ABT R14_ABT R13_IRQ R14_IRQ R13_UND R14_UND R15 (PC) CPSR USER MODE SPSR_FIQ FIQ MODE SPSR_SVC SVC MODE SPSR_ABT ABORT MODE SPSR_IRQ IRQ MODE Figure 44. Register Organization Rev. G | Page 39 of 101 SPSR_UND UNDEFINED MODE 04955-007 EXCEPTIONS ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 More information relative to the programmer's model and the ARM7TDMI core architecture can be found in the following materials from ARM: DDI0029G, ARM7TDMI Technical Reference Manual DDI-0100, ARM Architecture Reference Manual INTERRUPT LATENCY The worst-case latency for a fast interrupt request (FIQ) consists of the following: The longest time the request can take to pass through the synchronizer The time for the longest instruction to complete (the longest instruction is an LDM) that loads all the registers including the PC The time for the data abort entry The time for FIQ entry Data Sheet At the end of this time, the ARM7TDMI executes the instruction at 0x1C (FIQ interrupt vector address). The maximum total time is 50 processor cycles, which is just under 1.2 s in a system using a continuous 41.78 MHz processor clock. The maximum interrupt request (IRQ) latency calculation is similar but must allow for the fact that FIQ has higher priority and may delay entry into the IRQ handling routine for an arbitrary length of time. This time can be reduced to 42 cycles if the LDM command is not used. Some compilers have an option to compile without using this command. Another option is to run the part in thumb mode where the time is reduced to 22 cycles. The minimum latency for FIQ or IRQ interrupts is a total of five cycles, which consist of the shortest time the request can take through the synchronizer plus the time to enter the exception mode. Note that the ARM7TDMI always runs in ARM (32-bit) mode when in privileged modes, for example, when executing interrupt service routines. Rev. G | Page 40 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 MEMORY ORGANIZATION The ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 incorporate two separate blocks of memory: 8 kB of SRAM and 64 kB of on-chip Flash/EE memory. The 62 kB of on-chip Flash/EE memory is available to the user, and the remaining 2 kB are reserved for the factory-configured boot page. These two blocks are mapped as shown in Figure 45. 0xFFFFFFFF MMRs 0xFFFF0000 RESERVED 0x40000FFFF EXTERNAL MEMORY REGION 3 0x40000000 RESERVED 0x30000FFFF EXTERNAL MEMORY REGION 2 0x30000000 RESERVED 0x20000FFFF EXTERNAL MEMORY REGION 1 0x20000000 RESERVED 0x10000FFFF EXTERNAL MEMORY REGION 0 0x10000000 RESERVED The total 64 kB of Flash/EE memory is organized as 32 k x 16 bits; 31 k x 16 bits is user space and 1 k x 16 bits is reserved for the on-chip kernel. The page size of this Flash/EE memory is 512 bytes. Sixty-two kilobytes of Flash/EE memory are available to the user as code and nonvolatile data memory. There is no distinction between data and program because ARM code shares the same space. The real width of the Flash/EE memory is 16 bits, which means that in ARM mode (32-bit instruction), two accesses to the Flash/EE are necessary for each instruction fetch. It is therefore recommended to use thumb mode when executing from Flash/EE memory for optimum access speed. The maximum access speed for the Flash/EE memory is 41.78 MHz in thumb mode and 20.89 MHz in full ARM mode. More details about Flash/EE access time are outlined in the Execution Time from SRAM and Flash/EE section. SRAM 0x0008FFFF FLASH/EE 0x00080000 RESERVED SRAM 0x00010000 0x0000FFFF REMAPPABLE MEMORY SPACE (FLASH/EE OR SRAM) 0x00000000 04955-008 0x00011FFF Figure 45. Physical Memory Map Note that by default, after a reset, the Flash/EE memory is mirrored at Address 0x00000000. It is possible to remap the SRAM at Address 0x00000000 by clearing Bit 0 of the REMAP MMR. This remap function is described in more detail in the Flash/EE Memory section. MEMORY ACCESS The ARM7 core sees memory as a linear array of a 232 byte location where the different blocks of memory are mapped as outlined in Figure 45. The ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 memory organizations are configured in little endian format, which means that the least significant byte is located in the lowest byte address, and the most significant byte is in the highest byte address. BIT 0 BYTE 3 . . . BYTE 2 . . . BYTE 1 . . . BYTE 0 . . . B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 0x00000004 3 2 1 0 0x00000000 0xFFFFFFFF 32 BITS 04955-009 BIT 31 FLASH/EE MEMORY Eight kilobytes of SRAM are available to the user, organized as 2 k x 32 bits, that is, two words. ARM code can run directly from SRAM at 41.78 MHz, given that the SRAM array is configured as a 32-bit wide memory array. More details about SRAM access time are outlined in the Execution Time from SRAM and Flash/EE section. MEMORY MAPPED REGISTERS The memory mapped register (MMR) space is mapped into the upper two pages of the memory array and accessed by indirect addressing through the ARM7 banked registers. The MMR space provides an interface between the CPU and all on-chip peripherals. All registers, except the core registers, reside in the MMR area. All shaded locations shown in Figure 47 are unoccupied or reserved locations and should not be accessed by user software. Table 16 shows the full MMR memory map. The access time for reading from or writing to an MMR depends on the advanced microcontroller bus architecture (AMBA) bus used to access the peripheral. The processor has two AMBA buses: the advanced high performance bus (AHB) used for system modules and the advanced peripheral bus (APB) used for lower performance peripheral. Access to the AHB is one cycle, and access to the APB is two cycles. All peripherals on the ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 are on the APB except the Flash/EE memory, the GPIOs (see Table 78), and the PWM. Figure 46. Little Endian Format Rev. G | Page 41 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 0xFFFFFFFF Data Sheet Table 16. Complete MMR List 0xFFFFFC3C PWM Address Name Byte IRQ Address Base = 0xFFFF0000 0x0000 IRQSTA 4 0x0004 IRQSIG1 4 0x0008 IRQEN 4 0x000C IRQCLR 4 0x0010 SWICFG 4 0x0100 FIQSTA 4 0x0104 FIQSIG1 4 0x0108 FIQEN 4 0x010C FIQCLR 4 0xFFFFFC00 0xFFFFF820 0xFFFFF800 FLASH CONTROL INTERFACE 0xFFFFF46C GPIO 0xFFFFF400 0xFFFF0B54 PLA 0xFFFF0B00 0xFFFF0A14 SPI 0xFFFF0A00 0xFFFF0948 I2C1 1 0xFFFF0900 Access Type Default Value Page R R R/W W W R R R/W W 0x00000000 0x00XXX000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00XXX000 0x00000000 0x00000000 83 83 83 83 84 84 84 84 84 Depends on the level on the external interrupt pins (P0.4, P0.5, P1.4, and P1.5). 0xFFFF0848 I2C0 System Control Address Base = 0xFFFF0200 0x0220 REMAP 1 R/W 0xXX1 0x0230 RSTSTA 1 R/W 0x01 0x0234 RSTCLR 1 W 0x00 0xFFFF0800 0xFFFF0730 UART 0xFFFF0700 0xFFFF0620 1 DAC 55 55 55 Depends on the model. 0xFFFF0600 0xFFFF0538 ADC 0xFFFF0500 0xFFFF0490 0xFFFF048C 0xFFFF0448 0xFFFF0440 0xFFFF0420 0xFFFF0404 0xFFFF0370 0xFFFF0360 0xFFFF0350 0xFFFF0340 0xFFFF0334 0xFFFF0320 0xFFFF0310 BAND GAP REFERENCE POWER SUPPLY MONITOR PLL AND OSCILLATOR CONTROL WATCHDOG TIMER WAKE-UP TIMER GENERAL-PURPOSE TIMER TIMER 0 0xFFFF0300 0xFFFF0220 0xFFFF0110 0xFFFF0000 REMAP AND SYSTEM CONTROL INTERRUPT CONTROLLER 04955-010 0xFFFF0238 Figure 47. Memory Mapped Registers Timer Address Base = 0xFFFF0300 0x0300 T0LD 2 R/W 0x0304 T0VAL 2 R 0x0308 T0CON 2 R/W 0x030C T0CLRI 1 W 0x0320 T1LD 4 R/W 0x0324 T1VAL 4 R 0x0328 T1CON 2 R/W 0x032C T1CLRI 1 W 0x0330 T1CAP 4 R/W 0x0340 T2LD 4 R/W 0x0344 T2VAL 4 R 0x0348 T2CON 2 R/W 0x034C T2CLRI 1 W 0x0360 T3LD 2 R/W 0x0364 T3VAL 2 R 0x0368 T3CON 2 R/W 0x036C T3CLRI 1 W 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 0xFF 0x00000000 0xFFFFFFFF 0x0000 0xFF 0x00000000 0x00000000 0xFFFFFFFF 0x0000 0xFF 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 0x00 85 85 85 85 86 86 86 87 87 87 87 87 88 88 88 88 89 PLL Base Address = 0xFFFF0400 0x0404 POWKEY1 2 0x0408 POWCON 2 0x040C POWKEY2 2 0x0410 PLLKEY1 2 0x0414 PLLCON 1 0x0418 PLLKEY2 2 W R/W W W R/W W 0x0000 0x0003 0x0000 0x0000 0x21 0x0000 60 60 60 60 60 60 PSM Address Base = 0xFFFF0440 0x0440 PSMCON 2 R/W 0x0444 CMPCON 2 R/W 0x0008 0x0000 57 58 Rev. G | Page 42 of 101 Data Sheet Access Address Name Byte Type Reference Address Base = 0xFFFF0480 0x048C REFCON 1 R/W ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Default Value Page 0x00 50 ADC Address Base = 0xFFFF0500 0x0500 ADCCON 2 R/W 0x0504 ADCCP 1 R/W 0x0508 ADCCN 1 R/W 0x050C ADCSTA 1 R 0x0510 ADCDAT 4 R 0x0514 ADCRST 1 R/W 0x0530 ADCGN 2 R/W 0x0534 ADCOF 2 R/W 0x0600 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x00000000 0x00 0x0200 0x0200 46 47 47 48 48 48 48 48 DAC Address Base = 0xFFFF0600 0x0600 DAC0CON 1 R/W 0x0604 DAC0DAT 4 R/W 0x0608 DAC1CON 1 R/W 0x060C DAC1DAT 4 R/W 0x0610 DAC2CON 1 R/W 0x0614 DAC2DAT 4 R/W 0x0618 DAC3CON 1 R/W 0x061C DAC3DAT 4 R/W 0x00 0x00000000 0x00 0x00000000 0x00 0x00000000 0x00 0x00000000 56 56 56 56 56 56 56 56 UART Base Address = 0xFFFF0700 0x0700 COMTX 1 R/W COMRX 1 R COMDIV0 1 R/W 0x0704 COMIEN0 1 R/W COMDIV1 1 R/W 0x0708 COMIID0 1 R 0x070C COMCON0 1 R/W 0x0710 COMCON1 1 R/W 0x0714 COMSTA0 1 R 0x0718 COMSTA1 1 R 0x071C COMSCR 1 R/W 0x0720 COMIEN1 1 R/W 0x0724 COMIID1 1 R 0x0728 COMADR 1 R/W 0x072C COMDIV2 2 R/W 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x00 0x60 0x00 0x00 0x04 0x01 0xAA 0x0000 71 71 71 71 72 72 72 72 72 73 73 73 73 74 73 Access Address Name Byte Type I2C0 Base Address = 0xFFFF0800 0x0800 I2C0MSTA 1 R/W 0x0804 I2C0SSTA 1 R 0x0808 I2C0SRX 1 R 0x080C I2C0STX 1 W 0x0810 I2C0MRX 1 R 0x0814 I2C0MTX 1 W 0x0818 I2C0CNT 1 R/W 0x081C I2C0ADR 1 R/W 0x0824 I2C0BYTE 1 R/W 0x0828 I2C0ALT 1 R/W 0x082C I2C0CFG 1 R/W 0x0830 I2C0DIV 2 R/W 0x0838 I2C0ID0 1 R/W 0x083C I2C0ID1 1 R/W 0x0840 I2C0ID2 1 R/W 0x0844 I2C0ID3 1 R/W 0x0848 I2C0CCNT 1 R/W 0x084C I2C0FSTA 2 R/W Default Value Page 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x1F1F 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x0000 76 76 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 78 78 79 79 79 79 79 79 79 I2C1 Base Address = 0xFFFF0900 0x0900 I2C1MSTA 1 R/W 0x0904 I2C1SSTA 1 R 0x0908 I2C1SRX 1 R 0x090C I2C1STX 1 W 0x0910 I2C1MRX 1 R 0x0914 I2C1MTX 1 W 0x0918 I2C1CNT 1 R/W 0x091C I2C1ADR 1 R/W 0x0924 I2C1BYTE 1 R/W 0x0928 I2C1ALT 1 R/W 0x092C I2C1CFG 1 R/W 0x0930 I2C1DIV 2 R/W 0x0938 I2C1ID0 1 R/W 0x093C I2C1ID1 1 R/W 0x0940 I2C1ID2 1 R/W 0x0944 I2C1ID3 1 R/W 0x0948 I2C1CCNT 1 R/W 0x094C I2C1FSTA 2 R/W 0x00 0x01 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x1F1F 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x0000 76 76 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 78 78 79 79 79 79 79 79 79 SPI Base Address = 0xFFFF0A00 0x0A00 SPISTA 1 0x0A04 SPIRX 1 0x0A08 SPITX 1 0x0A0C SPIDIV 1 0x0A10 SPICON 2 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x1B 0x0000 75 75 75 75 75 Rev. G | Page 43 of 101 R R W R/W R/W ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Address Name Byte PLA Base Address = 0xFFFF0B00 0x0B00 PLAELM0 2 0x0B04 PLAELM1 2 0x0B08 PLAELM2 2 0x0B0C PLAELM3 2 0x0B10 PLAELM4 2 0x0B14 PLAELM5 2 0x0B18 PLAELM6 2 0x0B1C PLAELM7 2 0x0B20 PLAELM8 2 0x0B24 PLAELM9 2 0x0B28 PLAELM10 2 0x0B2C PLAELM11 2 0x0B30 PLAELM12 2 0x0B34 PLAELM13 2 0x0B38 PLAELM14 2 0x0B3C PLAELM15 2 0x0B40 PLACLK 1 0x0B44 PLAIRQ 4 0x0B48 PLAADC 4 0x0B4C PLADIN 4 0x0B50 PLADOUT 4 0x0B54 PLALCK 1 Access Type Default Value Page R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R W 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x00 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 81 81 82 82 82 82 Data Sheet Access Address Name Byte Type GPIO Base Address = 0xFFFFF400 0xF400 GP0CON 4 R/W 0xF404 GP1CON 4 R/W 0xF408 GP2CON 4 R/W 0xF40C GP3CON 4 R/W 0xF410 GP4CON 4 R/W 0xF420 GP0DAT 4 R/W 0xF424 GP0SET 4 W 0xF428 GP0CLR 4 W 0xF42C GP0PAR 4 R/W 0xF430 GP1DAT 4 R/W 0xF434 GP1SET 4 W 0xF438 GP1CLR 4 W 0xF43C GP1PAR 4 R/W 0xF440 GP2DAT 4 R/W 0xF444 GP2SET 4 W 0xF448 GP2CLR 4 W 0xF450 GP3DAT 4 R/W 0xF454 GP3SET 4 W 0xF458 GP3CLR 4 W 0xF460 GP4DAT 4 R/W 0xF464 GP4SET 4 W 0xF468 GP4CLR 4 W 1 External Memory Base Address = 0xFFFFF000 0xF000 XMCFG 1 R/W 0x00 0xF010 XM0CON 1 R/W 0x00 0xF014 XM1CON 1 R/W 0x00 0xF018 XM2CON 1 R/W 0x00 0xF01C XM3CON 1 R/W 0x00 0xF020 XM0PAR 2 R/W 0x70FF 0xF024 XM1PAR 2 R/W 0x70FF 0xF028 XM2PAR 2 R/W 0x70FF 0xF02C XM3PAR 2 R/W 0x70FF 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 Page 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x000000XX1 0x000000XX1 0x000000XX1 0x20000000 0x000000XX1 0x000000XX1 0x000000XX1 0x00000000 0x000000XX1 0x000000XX1 0x000000XX1 0x000000XX1 0x000000XX1 0x000000XX1 0x000000XX1 0x000000XX1 0x000000XX1 68 68 68 68 68 70 70 70 68 69 70 70 68 69 70 70 69 70 70 69 70 70 0x20 0x0000 0x07 0xXXXX1 0x0000 0xFFFFFF 0x00000000 0xFFFFFFFF 52 52 53 53 53 53 53 53 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 66 66 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 67 X = 0, 1, 2, or 3. Flash/EE Base Address = 0xFFFFF800 0xF800 FEESTA 1 R 0xF804 FEEMOD 2 R/W 0xF808 FEECON 1 R/W 0xF80C FEEDAT 2 R/W 0xF810 FEEADR 2 R/W 0xF818 FEESIGN 3 R 0xF81C FEEPRO 4 R/W 0xF820 FEEHIDE 4 R/W 1 Default Value X = 0, 1, 2, or 3. PWM Base Address = 0xFFFFFC00 0xFC00 PWMCON 2 R/W 0xFC04 PWMSTA 2 R/W 0xFC08 PWMDAT0 2 R/W 0xFC0C PWMDAT1 2 R/W 0xFC10 PWMCFG 2 R/W 0xFC14 PWMCH0 2 R/W 0xFC18 PWMCH1 2 R/W 0xFC1C PWMCH2 2 R/W 0xFC20 PWMEN 2 R/W 0xFC24 PWMDAT2 2 R/W Rev. G | Page 44 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 ADC CIRCUIT OVERVIEW The converter accepts an analog input range of 0 V to VREF when operating in single-ended or pseudo differential mode. In fully differential mode, the input signal must be balanced around a common-mode voltage (VCM) in the 0 V to AVDD range with a maximum amplitude of 2 VREF (see Figure 48). AVDD VCM VCM 2VREF VCM 2VREF 0 04955-011 2VREF Figure 48. Examples of Balanced Signals in Fully Differential Mode A high precision, low drift, factory calibrated, 2.5 V reference is provided on-chip. An external reference can also be connected as described in the Band Gap Reference section. Single or continuous conversion modes can be initiated in the software. An external CONVSTART pin, an output generated from the on-chip PLA, or a Timer0 or Timer1 overflow can also be used to generate a repetitive trigger for ADC conversions. A voltage output from an on-chip band gap reference proportional to absolute temperature can also be routed through the front-end ADC multiplexer, effectively an additional ADC channel input. This facilitates an internal temperature sensor channel that measures die temperature to an accuracy of 3C. TRANSFER FUNCTION Pseudo Differential and Single-Ended Modes 1111 1111 1101 1111 1111 1100 1LSB = FS 4096 0000 0000 0011 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0V 1LSB +FS - 1LSB VOLTAGE INPUT 04955-012 Fully differential mode, for small and balanced signals Single-ended mode, for any single-ended signals Pseudo differential mode, for any single-ended signals, taking advantage of the common-mode rejection offered by the pseudo differential input 1111 1111 1110 Figure 49. ADC Transfer Function in Pseudo Differential or Single-Ended Mode Fully Differential Mode The amplitude of the differential signal is the difference between the signals applied to the VIN+ and VIN- input voltage pins (that is, VIN+ - VIN-). The maximum amplitude of the differential signal is, therefore, -VREF to +VREF p-p (that is, 2 x VREF). This is regardless of the common mode (CM). The common mode is the average of the two signals, for example, (VIN+ + VIN-)/2, and is, therefore, the voltage that the two inputs are centered on. This results in the span of each input being CM VREF/2. This voltage has to be set up externally, and its range varies with VREF (see the Driving the Analog Inputs section). The output coding is twos complement in fully differential mode with 1 LSB = 2 VREF/4096 or 2 x 2.5 V/4096 = 1.22 mV when VREF = 2.5 V. The output result is 11 bits, but this is shifted by 1 to the right. This allows the result in ADCDAT to be declared as a signed integer when writing C code. The designed code transitions occur midway between successive integer LSB values (that is, 1/2 LSB, 3/2 LSB, 5/2 LSB, ... , FS - 3/2 LSB). The ideal input/output transfer characteristic is shown in Figure 50. SIGN BIT 0 1111 1111 1110 0 1111 1111 1100 1LSB = 2 x VREF 4096 0 1111 1111 1010 In pseudo differential or single-ended mode, the input range is 0 V to VREF. The output coding is straight binary in pseudo differential and single-ended modes with 0 0000 0000 0010 0 0000 0000 0000 1 1111 1111 1110 1 0000 0000 0100 1 0000 0000 0010 1 0000 0000 0000 -VREF + 1LSB 0LSB +VREF - 1LSB VOLTAGE INPUT (VIN+ - VIN-) 1 LSB = FS/4096, or 2.5 V/4096 = 0.61 mV, or 610 V when VREF = 2.5 V Figure 50. ADC Transfer Function in Differential Mode Rev. G | Page 45 of 101 04955-013 1111 1111 1111 OUTPUT CODE The ADC consists of a 12-bit successive approximation converter based around two capacitor DACs. Depending on the input signal configuration, the ADC can operate in one of three modes. The ideal code transitions occur midway between successive integer LSB values (that is, 1/2 LSB, 3/2 LSB, 5/2 LSB, ... , FS - 3/2 LSB). The ideal input/output transfer characteristic is shown in Figure 49. OUTPUT CODE The analog-to-digital converter (ADC) incorporates a fast, multichannel, 12-bit ADC. It can operate from 2.7 V to 3.6 V supplies and is capable of providing a throughput of up to 1 MSPS when the clock source is 41.78 MHz. This block provides the user with a multichannel multiplexer, a differential track-and-hold, an on-chip reference, and an ADC. ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet ACQ TYPICAL OPERATION Once configured via the ADC control and channel selection registers, the ADC converts the analog input and provides a 12-bit result in the ADC data register. SIGN BITS ADCBUSY DATA ADCDAT 0 12-BIT ADC RESULT ADCSTA = 0 ADCSTA = 1 04955-015 16 15 CONVSTART 04955-014 27 WRITE ADC CLOCK The top four bits are the sign bits. The 12-bit result is placed from Bit 16 to Bit 27, as shown in Figure 51. Again, it should be noted that, in fully differential mode, the result is represented in twos complement format. In pseudo differential and singleended modes, the result is represented in straight binary format. 31 BIT TRIAL ADC INTERRUPT Figure 51. ADC Result Format Figure 52. ADC Timing The same format is used in DACxDAT, simplifying the software. ADuC7019 The ADC in standby mode, that is, powered up but not converting, typically consumes 640 A. The internal reference adds 140 A. During conversion, the extra current is 0.3 A multiplied by the sampling frequency (in kilohertz (kHz)). Figure 43 shows the current consumption vs. the sampling frequency of the ADC. The ADuC7019 is identical to the ADuC7020 except for one buffered ADC channel, ADC3, and it has only three DACs. The output buffer of the fourth DAC is internally connected to the ADC3 channel as shown in Figure 53. ADuC7019 MUX Timing ADC3 Figure 52 gives details of the ADC timing. Users control the ADC clock speed and the number of acquisition clocks in the ADCCON MMR. By default, the acquisition time is eight clocks and the clock divider is 2. The number of extra clocks (such as bit trial or write) is set to 19, which gives a sampling rate of 774 kSPS. For conversion on the temperature sensor, the ADC acquisition time is automatically set to 16 clocks, and the ADC clock divider is set to 32. When using multiple channels, including the temperature sensor, the timing settings revert to the user-defined settings after reading the temperature sensor channel. 1MSPS 12-BIT ADC 12-BIT DAC DAC3 04955-016 Current Consumption ADC15 Figure 53. ADC3 Buffered Input Note that the DAC3 output pin must be connected to a 10 nF capacitor to AGND. This channel should be used to measure dc voltages only. ADC calibration may be necessary on this channel. MMRS INTERFACE The ADC is controlled and configured via the eight MMRs described in this section. Table 17. ADCCON Register Name ADCCON Address 0xFFFF0500 Default Value 0x0600 Access R/W ADCCON is an ADC control register that allows the programmer to enable the ADC peripheral, select the mode of operation of the ADC (in single-ended mode, pseudo differential mode, or fully differential mode), and select the conversion type. This MMR is described in Table 18. Rev. G | Page 46 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Table 18. ADCCON MMR Bit Designations Table 19. ADCCP Register Bit 15:13 12:10 Name ADCCP Value 000 001 010 011 100 101 9:8 00 01 10 11 7 6 5 4:3 00 01 10 11 2:0 000 001 010 011 100 101 Other Description Reserved. ADC clock speed. fADC/1. This divider is provided to obtain 1 MSPS ADC with an external clock <41.78 MHz. fADC/2 (default value). fADC/4. fADC/8. fADC/16. fADC/32. ADC acquisition time. Two clocks. Four clocks. Eight clocks (default value). 16 clocks. Enable start conversion. Set by the user to start any type of conversion command. Cleared by the user to disable a start conversion (clearing this bit does not stop the ADC when continuously converting). Reserved. ADC power control. Set by the user to place the ADC in normal mode (the ADC must be powered up for at least 5 s before it converts correctly). Cleared by the user to place the ADC in power-down mode. Conversion mode. Single-ended mode. Differential mode. Pseudo differential mode. Reserved. Conversion type. Enable CONVSTART pin as a conversion input. Enable Timer1 as a conversion input. Enable Timer0 as a conversion input. Single software conversion. Sets to 000 after conversion (note that Bit 7 of ADCCON MMR should be cleared after starting a single software conversion to avoid further conversions triggered by the CONVSTART pin). Continuous software conversion. PLA conversion. Reserved. Address 0xFFFF0504 Default Value 0x00 Access R/W ADCCP is an ADC positive channel selection register. This MMR is described in Table 20. Table 20. ADCCP1 MMR Bit Designation Bit 7:5 4:0 Value 00000 00001 00010 00011 00100 00101 00110 00111 01000 01001 01010 01011 01100 01101 01110 01111 10000 10001 10010 10011 Others 1 Description Reserved. Positive channel selection bits. ADC0. ADC1. ADC2. ADC3. ADC4. ADC5. ADC6. ADC7. ADC8. ADC9. ADC10. ADC11. DAC0/ADC12. DAC1/ADC13. DAC2/ADC14. DAC3/ADC15. Temperature sensor. AGND (self-diagnostic feature). Internal reference (self-diagnostic feature). AVDD/2. Reserved. ADC and DAC channel availability depends on the part model. See Ordering Guide for details. Table 21. ADCCN Register Name ADCCN Address 0xFFFF0508 Default Value 0x01 Access R/W ADCCN is an ADC negative channel selection register. This MMR is described in Table 22. Rev. G | Page 47 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet Table 22. ADCCN MMR Bit Designation Table 27. ADCOF Register Bit 7:5 4:0 Name ADCOF Table 23. ADCSTA Register Name ADCSTA Address 0xFFFF050C Table 24. ADCDAT Register Name ADCDAT Address 0xFFFF0510 Default Value 0x00000000 Access R ADCDAT is an ADC data result register. It holds the 12-bit ADC result as shown in Figure 51. The ADC incorporates a successive approximation (SAR) architecture involving a charge-sampled input stage. This architecture can operate in three modes: differential, pseudo differential, and single-ended. Differential Mode The ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 each contain a successive approximation ADC based on two capacitive DACs. Figure 54 and Figure 55 show simplified schematics of the ADC in acquisition and conversion phase, respectively. The ADC comprises control logic, a SAR, and two capacitive DACs. In Figure 54 (the acquisition phase), SW3 is closed and SW1 and SW2 are in Position A. The comparator is held in a balanced condition, and the sampling capacitor arrays acquire the differential signal on the input. CAPACITIVE DAC CHANNEL+ MUX AIN11 B CS A SW1 CHANNEL- A SW2 CS COMPARATOR SW3 Address 0xFFFF0514 VREF CAPACITIVE DAC Figure 54. ADC Acquisition Phase When the ADC starts a conversion, as shown in Figure 55, SW3 opens, and then SW1 and SW2 move to Position B. This causes the comparator to become unbalanced. Both inputs are disconnected once the conversion begins. The control logic and the charge redistribution DACs are used to add and subtract fixed amounts of charge from the sampling capacitor arrays to bring the comparator back into a balanced condition. When the comparator is rebalanced, the conversion is complete. The control logic generates the ADC output code. The output impedances of the sources driving the VIN+ and VIN- input voltage pins must be matched; otherwise, the two inputs have different settling times, resulting in errors. CAPACITIVE DAC Default Value 0x00 Access R/W ADCRST resets the digital interface of the ADC. Writing any value to this register resets all the ADC registers to their default values. Address 0xFFFF0530 CHANNEL+ AIN0 MUX AIN11 B CS A SW1 CHANNEL- A SW2 CS COMPARATOR SW3 Default Value 0x0200 Access R/W ADCGN is a 10-bit gain calibration register. Rev. G | Page 48 of 101 CONTROL LOGIC B VREF Table 26. ADCGN Register Name ADCGN CONTROL LOGIC B Table 25. ADCRST Register Name ADCRST Access R/W CONVERTER OPERATION Access R ADCSTA is an ADC status register that indicates when an ADC conversion result is ready. The ADCSTA register contains only one bit, ADCReady (Bit 0), representing the status of the ADC. This bit is set at the end of an ADC conversion, generating an ADC interrupt. It is cleared automatically by reading the ADCDAT MMR. When the ADC is performing a conversion, the status of the ADC can be read externally via the ADCBUSY pin. This pin is high during a conversion. When the conversion is finished, ADCBUSY goes back low. This information can be available on P0.5 (see the General-Purpose Input/Output section) if enabled in the ADCCON register. Default Value 0x0200 ADCOF is a 10-bit offset calibration register. AIN0 Default Value 0x00 Address 0xFFFF0534 04955-017 00000 00001 00010 00011 00100 00101 00110 00111 01000 01001 01010 01011 01100 01101 01110 01111 10000 Others Description Reserved. Negative channel selection bits. ADC0. ADC1. ADC2. ADC3. ADC4. ADC5. ADC6. ADC7. ADC8. ADC9. ADC10. ADC11. DAC0/ADC12. DAC1/ADC13. DAC2/ADC14. DAC3/ADC15. Internal reference (self-diagnostic feature). Reserved. Figure 55. ADC Conversion Phase CAPACITIVE DAC 04955-018 Value Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 AVDD Pseudo Differential Mode In pseudo differential mode, Channel- is linked to the VIN- pin of the ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29. SW2 switches between A (Channel-) and B (VREF). The VIN- pin must be connected to ground or a low voltage. The input signal on VIN+ can then vary from VIN- to VREF + VIN-. Note that VIN- must be chosen so that VREF + VIN- does not exceed AVDD. D C1 D AVDD D CAPACITIVE DAC A SW1 MUX A AIN11 SW2 CS C1 COMPARATOR SW3 CONTROL LOGIC Figure 58. Equivalent Analog Input Circuit Conversion Phase: Switches Open, Track Phase: Switches Closed VREF CAPACITIVE DAC CHANNEL- 04955-019 B Figure 56. ADC in Pseudo Differential Mode Single-Ended Mode In single-ended mode, SW2 is always connected internally to ground. The VIN- pin can be floating. The input signal range on VIN+ is 0 V to VREF. CAPACITIVE DAC CHANNEL+ MUX AIN11 B CS A SW1 CS COMPARATOR SW3 ADuC7019/ ADuC702x CONTROL LOGIC 10 CHANNEL- ADC0 0.01F CAPACITIVE DAC 04955-020 AIN0 For ac applications, removing high frequency components from the analog input signal is recommended by using an RC lowpass filter on the relevant analog input pins. In applications where harmonic distortion and signal-to-noise ratio are critical, the analog input should be driven from a low impedance source. Large source impedances significantly affect the ac performance of the ADC. This can necessitate the use of an input buffer amplifier. The choice of the op amp is a function of the particular application. Figure 59 and Figure 60 give an example of an ADC front end. Figure 59. Buffering Single-Ended/Pseudo Differential Input Figure 57. ADC in Single-Ended Mode ADuC7019/ ADuC702x Analog Input Structure ADC0 Figure 58 shows the equivalent circuit of the analog input structure of the ADC. The four diodes provide ESD protection for the analog inputs. Care must be taken to ensure that the analog input signals never exceed the supply rails by more than 300 mV; exceeding 300 mV causes these diodes to become forwardbiased and start conducting into the substrate. These diodes can conduct up to 10 mA without causing irreversible damage to the part. The C1 capacitors in Figure 58 are typically 4 pF and can be primarily attributed to pin capacitance. The resistors are lumped components made up of the on resistance of the switches. The value of these resistors is typically about 100 . The C2 capacitors are the ADC's sampling capacitors and typically have a capacitance of 16 pF. VREF ADC1 04955-062 VIN- D 04955-061 CS B R1 C2 04955-021 CHANNEL+ AIN0 R1 C2 Figure 60. Buffering Differential Inputs When no amplifier is used to drive the analog input, the source impedance should be limited to values lower than 1 k. The maximum source impedance depends on the amount of total harmonic distortion (THD) that can be tolerated. The THD increases as the source impedance increases and the performance degrades. DRIVING THE ANALOG INPUTS Internal or external references can be used for the ADC. In the differential mode of operation, there are restrictions on the common-mode input signal (VCM), which is dependent upon the reference value and supply voltage used to ensure that the signal remains within the supply rails. Table 28 gives some calculated VCM minimum and VCM maximum values. Rev. G | Page 49 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Table 28. VCM Ranges AVDD 3.3 V 3.0 V VREF 2.5 V 2.048 V 1.25 V 2.5 V 2.048 V 1.25 V VCM Min 1.25 V 1.024 V 0.75 V 1.25 V 1.024 V 0.75 V VCM Max 2.05 V 2.276 V 2.55 V 1.75 V 1.976 V 2.25 V Signal Peak-to-Peak 2.5 V 2.048 V 1.25 V 2.5 V 2.048 V 1.25 V Data Sheet ADCCP = 0x10; // Select Temperature Sensor as an // input to the ADC REFCON = 0x01; // connect internal 2.5V reference // to Vref pin ADCCON = 0xE4; // continuous conversion while(1) { while (!ADCSTA){}; // wait for end of conversion CALIBRATION b = (ADCDAT >> 16); By default, the factory-set values written to the ADC offset (ADCOF) and gain coefficient registers (ADCGN) yield optimum performance in terms of end-point errors and linearity for standalone operation of the part (see the Specifications section). If system calibration is required, it is possible to modify the default offset and gain coefficients to improve end-point errors, but note that any modification to the factory-set ADCOF and ADCGN values can degrade ADC linearity performance. For system offset error correction, the ADC channel input stage must be tied to AGND. A continuous software ADC conversion loop must be implemented by modifying the value in ADCOF until the ADC result (ADCDAT) reads Code 0 to Code 1. If the ADCDAT value is greater than 1, ADCOF should be decremented until ADCDAT reads 0 to 1. Offset error correction is done digitally and has a resolution of 0.25 LSB and a range of 3.125% of VREF. For system gain error correction, the ADC channel input stage must be tied to VREF. A continuous software ADC conversion loop must be implemented to modify the value in ADCGN until the ADC result (ADCDAT) reads Code 4094 to Code 4095. If the ADCDAT value is less than 4094, ADCGN should be incremented until ADCDAT reads 4094 to 4095. Similar to the offset calibration, the gain calibration resolution is 0.25 LSB with a range of 3% of VREF. TEMPERATURE SENSOR The ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 provide voltage output from on-chip band gap references proportional to absolute temperature. This voltage output can also be routed through the front-end ADC multiplexer (effectively an additional ADC channel input) facilitating an internal temperature sensor channel, measuring die temperature to an accuracy of 3C. The following is an example routine showing how to use the internal temperature sensor: // To calculate temperature in C, use the formula: a = 0x525 - b; // ((Temperature = 0x525 - Sensor Voltage) / 1.3) a /= 1.3; b = floor(a); printf("Temperature: %d oC\n",b); } return 0; } BAND GAP REFERENCE Each ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 provides an onchip band gap reference of 2.5 V, which can be used for the ADC and DAC. This internal reference also appears on the VREF pin. When using the internal reference, a 0.47 F capacitor must be connected from the external VREF pin to AGND to ensure stability and fast response during ADC conversions. This reference can also be connected to an external pin (VREF) and used as a reference for other circuits in the system. An external buffer is required because of the low drive capability of the VREF output. A programmable option also allows an external reference input on the VREF pin. Note that it is not possible to disable the internal reference. Therefore, the external reference source must be capable of overdriving the internal reference source. Table 29. REFCON Register Name REFCON { Access R/W Table 30. REFCON MMR Bit Designations float a = 0; short b; ADCCON = 0x20; Default Value 0x00 The band gap reference interface consists of an 8-bit MMR REFCON, described in Table 30. Bit 7:1 0 int main(void) Address 0xFFFF048C // power-on the ADC delay(2000); Rev. G | Page 50 of 101 Description Reserved. Internal reference output enable. Set by user to connect the internal 2.5 V reference to the VREF pin. The reference can be used for an external component but must be buffered. Cleared by user to disconnect the reference from the VREF pin. Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 NONVOLATILE FLASH/EE MEMORY Overall, Flash/EE memory represents a step closer to the ideal memory device that includes nonvolatility, in-circuit programmability, high density, and low cost. Incorporated in the ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29, Flash/EE memory technology allows the user to update program code space incircuit, without the need to replace one-time programmable (OTP) devices at remote operating nodes. Each part contains a 64 kB array of Flash/EE memory. The lower 62 kB is available to the user and the upper 2 kB contain permanently embedded firmware, allowing in-circuit serial download. These 2 kB of embedded firmware also contain a power-on configuration routine that downloads factorycalibrated coefficients to the various calibrated peripherals (such as ADC, temperature sensor, and band gap references). This 2 kB embedded firmware is hidden from user code. 600 300 150 Flash/EE Memory Reliability 0 The Flash/EE memory arrays on the parts are fully qualified for two key Flash/EE memory characteristics: Flash/EE memory cycling endurance and Flash/EE memory data retention. Endurance quantifies the ability of the Flash/EE memory to be cycled through many program, read, and erase cycles. A single endurance cycle is composed of four independent, sequential events, defined as 1. 2. 3. 4. 450 Initial page erase sequence Read/verify sequence (single Flash/EE) Byte program sequence memory Second read/verify sequence (endurance cycle) In reliability qualification, every half word (16-bit wide) location of the three pages (top, middle, and bottom) in the Flash/EE memory is cycled 10,000 times from 0x0000 to 0xFFFF. As indicated in Table 1, the Flash/EE memory endurance qualification is carried out in accordance with JEDEC Retention Lifetime Specification A117 over the industrial temperature range of -40 to +125C. The results allow the specification of a minimum endurance figure over a supply temperature of 10,000 cycles. 04955-085 Like EEPROM, flash memory can be programmed in-system at a byte level, although it must first be erased. The erase is performed in page blocks. As a result, flash memory is often and more correctly referred to as Flash/EE memory. Retention quantifies the ability of the Flash/EE memory to retain its programmed data over time. Again, the parts are qualified in accordance with the formal JEDEC Retention Lifetime Specification (A117) at a specific junction temperature (TJ = 85C). As part of this qualification procedure, the Flash/EE memory is cycled to its specified endurance limit, described in Table 1, before data retention is characterized. This means that the Flash/EE memory is guaranteed to retain its data for its fully specified retention lifetime every time the Flash/EE memory is reprogrammed. In addition, note that retention lifetime, based on an activation energy of 0.6 eV, derates with TJ as shown in Figure 61. RETENTION (Years) The ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 incorporate Flash/EE memory technology on-chip to provide the user with nonvolatile, in-circuit reprogrammable memory space. 30 40 55 70 85 100 125 JUNCTION TEMPERATURE (C) 135 150 Figure 61. Flash/EE Memory Data Retention PROGRAMMING The 62 kB of Flash/EE memory can be programmed in-circuit, using the serial download mode or the provided JTAG mode. Serial Downloading (In-Circuit Programming) The ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 facilitate code download via the standard UART serial port or via the I2C port. The parts enter serial download mode after a reset or power cycle if the BM pin is pulled low through an external 1 k resistor. After a part is in serial download mode, the user can download code to the full 62 kB of Flash/EE memory while the device is in-circuit in its target application hardware. An executable PC serial download is provided as part of the development system for serial downloading via the UART. The AN-806 Application Note describes the protocol for serial downloading via the I2C. JTAG Access The JTAG protocol uses the on-chip JTAG interface to facilitate code download and debug. Rev. G | Page 51 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet SECURITY FLASH/EE CONTROL INTERFACE The 62 kB of Flash/EE memory available to the user can be read and write protected. Serial and JTAG programming use the Flash/EE control interface, which includes the eight MMRs outlined in this section. Bit 31 of the FEEPRO/FEEHIDE MMR (see Table 42) protects the 62 kB from being read through JTAG programming mode. The other 31 bits of this register protect writing to the flash memory. Each bit protects four pages, that is, 2 kB. Write protection is activated for all types of access. Table 31. FEESTA Register Three Levels of Protection Protection can be set and removed by writing directly into FEEHIDE MMR. This protection does not remain after reset. Protection can be set by writing into the FEEPRO MMR. It takes effect only after a save protection command (0x0C) and a reset. The FEEPRO MMR is protected by a key to avoid direct access. The key is saved once and must be entered again to modify FEEPRO. A mass erase sets the key back to 0xFFFF but also erases all the user code. Flash can be permanently protected by using the FEEPRO MMR and a particular value of key: 0xDEADDEAD. Entering the key again to modify the FEEPRO register is not allowed. Name FEESTA 2. 3. 4. 5. Write the bit in FEEPRO corresponding to the page to be protected. Enable key protection by setting Bit 6 of FEEMOD (Bit 5 must equal 0). Write a 32-bit key in FEEADR and FEEDAT. Run the write key command 0x0C in FEECON; wait for the read to be successful by monitoring FEESTA. Reset the part. To remove or modify the protection, the same sequence is used with a modified value of FEEPRO. If the key chosen is the value 0xDEAD, the memory protection cannot be removed. Only a mass erase unprotects the part, but it also erases all user code. The sequence to write the key is illustrated in the following example (this protects writing Page 4 to Page 7 of the Flash): FEEPRO=0xFFFFFFFD; FEEMOD=0x48; FEEADR=0x1234; FEEDAT=0x5678; FEECON= 0x0C; //Protect pages 4 to 7 //Write key enable //16 bit key value //16 bit key value // Write key command The same sequence should be followed to protect the part permanently with FEEADR = 0xDEAD and FEEDAT = 0xDEAD. Default Value 0x20 Access R FEESTA is a read-only register that reflects the status of the flash control interface as described in Table 32. Table 32. FEESTA MMR Bit Designations Bit 15:6 5 4 3 2 1 Sequence to Write the Key 1. Address 0xFFFFF800 0 Description Reserved. Reserved. Reserved. Flash interrupt status bit. Set automatically when an interrupt occurs, that is, when a command is complete and the Flash/EE interrupt enable bit in the FEEMOD register is set. Cleared when reading the FEESTA register. Flash/EE controller busy. Set automatically when the controller is busy. Cleared automatically when the controller is not busy. Command fail. Set automatically when a command completes unsuccessfully. Cleared automatically when reading the FEESTA register. Command pass. Set by the MicroConverter when a command completes successfully. Cleared automatically when reading the FEESTA register. Table 33. FEEMOD Register Name FEEMOD Address 0xFFFFF804 Default Value 0x0000 Access R/W FEEMOD sets the operating mode of the flash control interface. Table 34 shows FEEMOD MMR bit designations. Table 34. FEEMOD MMR Bit Designations Bit 15:9 8 7:5 4 3 2:0 Rev. G | Page 52 of 101 Description Reserved. Reserved. This bit should always be set to 0. Reserved. These bits should always be set to 0 except when writing keys. See the Sequence to Write the Key section. Flash/EE interrupt enable. Set by user to enable the Flash/EE interrupt. The interrupt occurs when a command is complete. Cleared by user to disable the Flash/EE interrupt. Erase/write command protection. Set by user to enable the erase and write commands. Cleared to protect the Flash against the erase/write command. Reserved. These bits should always be set to 0. Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Table 35. FEECON Register Name FEECON Address 0xFFFFF808 Table 37. FEEDAT Register Default Value 0x07 Access R/W FEECON is an 8-bit command register. The commands are described in Table 36. Name FEEDAT 1 Address 0xFFFFF80C Table 38. FEEADR Register Name FEEADR 0x02 Single write 0x031 Erase/write 0x041 0x051 0x061 Single verify Single erase Mass erase 0x07 0x08 0x09 0x0A 0x0B Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Signature 0x0C Protect 0x0D 0x0E 0x0F Reserved Reserved Ping 1 Default Value 0x0000 Access R/W FEEDAT is a 16-bit data register. Table 36. Command Codes in FEECON 1 Access R/W X = 0, 1, 2, or 3. Code 0x001 0x011 Command Null Single read Default Value 0xXXXX1 Description Idle state. Load FEEDAT with the 16-bit data. Indexed by FEEADR. Write FEEDAT at the address pointed to by FEEADR. This operation takes 50 s. Erase the page indexed by FEEADR and write FEEDAT at the location pointed by FEEADR. This operation takes approximately 24 ms. Compare the contents of the location pointed by FEEADR to the data in FEEDAT. The result of the comparison is returned in FEESTA, Bit 1. Erase the page indexed by FEEADR. Erase 62 kB of user space. The 2 kB of kernel are protected. This operation takes 2.48 sec. To prevent accidental execution, a command sequence is required to execute this instruction. See the Command Sequence for Executing a Mass Erase section. Reserved. Reserved. Reserved. Reserved. Give a signature of the 64 kB of Flash/EE in the 24-bit FEESIGN MMR. This operation takes 32,778 clock cycles. This command can run only once. The value of FEEPRO is saved and removed only with a mass erase (0x06) of the key. Reserved. Reserved. No operation; interrupt generated. The FEECON register always reads 0x07 immediately after execution of any of these commands. Address 0xFFFFF810 FEEADR is another 16-bit address register. Table 39. FEESIGN Register Name FEESIGN Address 0xFFFFF818 Default Value 0xFFFFFF Access R FEESIGN is a 24-bit code signature. Table 40. FEEPRO Register Name FEEPRO Address 0xFFFFF81C Default Value 0x00000000 Access R/W FEEPRO MMR provides protection following a subsequent reset of the MMR. It requires a software key (see Table 42). Table 41. FEEHIDE Register Name FEEHIDE Address 0xFFFFF820 Default Value 0xFFFFFFFF Access R/W FEEHIDE MMR provides immediate protection. It does not require any software key. Note that the protection settings in FEEHIDE are cleared by a reset (see Table 42). Table 42. FEEPRO and FEEHIDE MMR Bit Designations Bit 31 30:0 Description Read protection. Cleared by user to protect all code. Set by user to allow reading the code. Write protection for Page 123 to Page 120, Page 119 to Page 116, and Page 0 to Page 3. Cleared by user to protect the pages from writing. Set by user to allow writing the pages. Command Sequence for Executing a Mass Erase FEEDAT=0x3CFF; FEEADR = 0xFFC3; FEEMOD= FEEMOD|0x8; FEECON=0x06; Rev. G | Page 53 of 101 //Erase key enable //Mass erase command ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet EXECUTION TIME FROM SRAM AND FLASH/EE RESET AND REMAP Execution from SRAM The ARM exception vectors are all situated at the bottom of the memory array, from Address 0x00000000 to Address 0x00000020, as shown in Figure 62. Fetching instructions from SRAM takes one clock cycle; the access time of the SRAM is 2 ns, and a clock cycle is 22 ns minimum. However, if the instruction involves reading or writing data to memory, one extra cycle must be added if the data is in SRAM (or three cycles if the data is in Flash/EE): one cycle to execute the instruction, and two cycles to get the 32-bit data from Flash/EE. A control flow instruction (a branch instruction, for example) takes one cycle to fetch but also takes two cycles to fill the pipeline with the new instructions. 0xFFFFFFFF KERNEL 0x0008FFFF FLASH/EE INTERRUPT SERVICE ROUTINES 0x00080000 INTERRUPT SERVICE ROUTINES 0x00010000 Execution from Flash/EE In ARM mode, where instructions are 32 bits, two cycles are needed to fetch any instruction when CD = 0. In thumb mode, where instructions are 16 bits, one cycle is needed to fetch any instruction. Timing is identical in both modes when executing instructions that involve using the Flash/EE for data memory. If the instruction to be executed is a control flow instruction, an extra cycle is needed to decode the new address of the program counter, and then four cycles are needed to fill the pipeline. A data-processing instruction involving only the core register does not require any extra clock cycles. However, if it involves data in Flash/EE, an extra clock cycle is needed to decode the address of the data, and two cycles are needed to get the 32-bit data from Flash/EE. An extra cycle must also be added before fetching another instruction. Data transfer instructions are more complex and are summarized in Table 43. Table 43. Execution Cycles in ARM/Thumb Mode Instructions LD1 LDH LDM/PUSH STR1 STRH STRM/POP 1 2 Fetch Cycles 2/1 2/1 2/1 2/1 2/1 2/1 Dead Time 1 1 N2 1 1 N1 Data Access 2 1 2 x N2 2 x 20 ns 20 ns 2 x N x 20 ns1 Dead Time 1 1 N1 1 1 N1 The SWAP instruction combines an LD and STR instruction with only one fetch, giving a total of eight cycles + 40 ns. N is the amount of data to load or store in the multiple load/store instruction (1 < N 16). 0x00011FFF SRAM MIRROR SPACE ARM EXCEPTION VECTOR ADDRESSES 0x00000020 0x00000000 0x00000000 04955-022 Because the Flash/EE width is 16 bits and access time for 16-bit words is 22 ns, execution from Flash/EE cannot be done in one cycle (as can be done from SRAM when the CD Bit = 0). Also, some dead times are needed before accessing data for any value of the CD bit. Figure 62. Remap for Exception Execution By default, and after any reset, the Flash/EE is mirrored at the bottom of the memory array. The remap function allows the programmer to mirror the SRAM at the bottom of the memory array, which facilitates execution of exception routines from SRAM instead of from Flash/EE. This means exceptions are executed twice as fast, being executed in 32-bit ARM mode with 32-bit wide SRAM instead of 16-bit wide Flash/EE memory. Remap Operation When a reset occurs on the ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/ 28/29, execution automatically starts in the factory-programmed, internal configuration code. This kernel is hidden and cannot be accessed by user code. If the part is in normal mode (the BM pin is high), it executes the power-on configuration routine of the kernel and then jumps to the reset vector address, 0x00000000, to execute the user's reset exception routine. Because the Flash/EE is mirrored at the bottom of the memory array at reset, the reset interrupt routine must always be written in Flash/EE. The remap is done from Flash/EE by setting Bit 0 of the REMAP register. Caution must be taken to execute this command from Flash/EE, above Address 0x00080020, and not from the bottom of the array because this is replaced by the SRAM. This operation is reversible. The Flash/EE can be remapped at Address 0x00000000 by clearing Bit 0 of the REMAP MMR. Caution must again be taken to execute the remap function from outside the mirrored area. Any type of reset remaps the Flash/EE memory at the bottom of the array. Rev. G | Page 54 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Reset Operation Table 46. RSTSTA Register There are four kinds of reset: external, power-on, watchdog expiration, and software force. The RSTSTA register indicates the source of the last reset, and RSTCLR allows clearing of the RSTSTA register. These registers can be used during a reset exception service routine to identify the source of the reset. If RSTSTA is null, the reset is external. Name RSTSTA Table 44. REMAP Register Name REMAP 1 Address 0xFFFF0220 Default Value 0xXX1 Access R/W Depends on the model. Name Bit 7:3 2 1 0 3 2:1 0 Remap Description Read-only bit. Indicates the size of the Flash/EE memory available. If this bit is set, only 32 kB of Flash/EE memory is available. Read-only bit. Indicates the size of the SRAM memory available. If this bit is set, only 4 kB of SRAM is available. Reserved. Remap bit. Set by user to remap the SRAM to Address 0x00000000. Cleared automatically after reset to remap the Flash/EE memory to Address 0x00000000. Default Value 0x01 Access R/W Table 47. RSTSTA MMR Bit Designations Table 45. REMAP MMR Bit Designations Bit 4 Address 0xFFFF0230 Description Reserved. Software reset. Set by user to force a software reset. Cleared by setting the corresponding bit in RSTCLR. Watchdog timeout. Set automatically when a watchdog timeout occurs. Cleared by setting the corresponding bit in RSTCLR. Power-on reset. Set automatically when a power-on reset occurs. Cleared by setting the corresponding bit in RSTCLR. Table 48. RSTCLR Register Name RSTCLR Address 0xFFFF0234 Default Value 0x00 Access W Note that to clear the RSTSTA register, the user must write 0x07 to the RSTCLR register. Rev. G | Page 55 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet OTHER ANALOG PERIPHERALS DAC Table 51. DACxDAT Registers The ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 incorporate two, three, or four 12-bit voltage output DACs on-chip, depending on the model. Each DAC has a rail-to-rail voltage output buffer capable of driving 5 k/100 pF. Name DAC0DAT DAC1DAT DAC2DAT DAC3DAT Each DAC has three selectable ranges: 0 V to VREF (internal band gap 2.5 V reference), 0 V to DACREF, and 0 V to AVDD. DACREF is equivalent to an external reference for the DAC. The signal range is 0 V to AVDD. Each DAC is independently configurable through a control register and a data register. These two registers are identical for the four DACs. Only DAC0CON (see Table 50) and DAC0DAT (see Table 52) are described in detail in this section. Table 49. DACxCON Registers Address 0xFFFF0600 0xFFFF0608 0xFFFF0610 0xFFFF0618 Default Value 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 Bit 31:28 27:16 15:0 Value DACCLK DACCLR 3 2 1:0 00 01 10 11 Description Reserved. 12-bit data for DAC0. Reserved. The on-chip DAC architecture consists of a resistor string DAC followed by an output buffer amplifier. The functional equivalent is shown in Figure 63. Access R/W R/W R/W R/W AVDD VREF DAC REF R R DAC0 R Description Reserved. DAC update rate. Set by user to update the DAC using Timer1. Cleared by user to update the DAC using HCLK (core clock). DAC clear bit. Set by user to enable normal DAC operation. Cleared by user to reset data register of the DAC to 0. Reserved. This bit should be left at 0. Reserved. This bit should be left at 0. DAC range bits. Power-down mode. The DAC output is in three-state. 0 V to DACREF range. 0 V to VREF (2.5 V) range. 0 V to AVDD range. R R 04955-023 4 Name Access R/W R/W R/W R/W Using the DACs Table 50. DAC0CON MMR Bit Designations Bit 7:6 5 Default Value 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 Table 52. DAC0DAT MMR Bit Designations MMRs Interface Name DAC0CON DAC1CON DAC2CON DAC3CON Address 0xFFFF0604 0xFFFF060C 0xFFFF0614 0xFFFF061C Figure 63. DAC Structure As illustrated in Figure 63, the reference source for each DAC is user-selectable in software. It can be AVDD, VREF, or DACREF. In 0-to-AVDD mode, the DAC output transfer function spans from 0 V to the voltage at the AVDD pin. In 0-to-DACREF mode, the DAC output transfer function spans from 0 V to the voltage at the DACREF pin. In 0-to-VREF mode, the DAC output transfer function spans from 0 V to the internal 2.5 V reference, VREF. The DAC output buffer amplifier features a true, rail-to-rail output stage implementation. This means that when unloaded, each output is capable of swinging to within less than 5 mV of both AVDD and ground. Moreover, the DAC's linearity specification (when driving a 5 k resistive load to ground) is guaranteed through the full transfer function, except Code 0 to Code 100, and, in 0-to-AVDD mode only, Code 3995 to Code 4095. Rev. G | Page 56 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Linearity degradation near ground and AVDD is caused by saturation of the output amplifier, and a general representation of its effects (neglecting offset and gain error) is illustrated in Figure 64. The dotted line in Figure 64 indicates the ideal transfer function, and the solid line represents what the transfer function may look like with endpoint nonlinearities due to saturation of the output amplifier. Note that Figure 64 represents a transfer function in 0-to-AVDD mode only. In 0-to-VREF or 0-to-DACREF mode (with VREF < AVDD or DACREF < AVDD), the lower nonlinearity is similar. However, the upper portion of the transfer function follows the ideal line right to the end (VREF in this case, not AVDD), showing no signs of endpoint linearity errors. AVDD AVDD - 100mV Table 54. PSMCON MMR Bit Descriptions Bit 3 Name CMP 2 1 TP PSMEN 0 PSMI Description Comparator bit. This is a read-only bit that directly reflects the state of the comparator. Read 1 indicates that the IOVDD supply is above its selected trip point or that the PSM is in power-down mode. Read 0 indicates that the IOVDD supply is below its selected trip point. This bit should be set before leaving the interrupt service routine. Trip point selection bit. 0 = 2.79 V, 1 = 3.07 V. Power supply monitor enable bit. Set to 1 to enable the power supply monitor circuit. Cleared to 0 to disable the power supply monitor circuit. Power supply monitor interrupt bit. This bit is set high by the MicroConverter after CMP goes low, indicating low I/O supply. The PSMI bit can be used to interrupt the processor. After CMP returns high, the PSMI bit can be cleared by writing a 1 to this location. A 0 write has no effect. There is no timeout delay; PSMI can be immediately cleared after CMP goes high. COMPARATOR 0x0FFF0000 Figure 64. Endpoint Nonlinearities Due to Amplifier Saturation The endpoint nonlinearities conceptually illustrated in Figure 64 get worse as a function of output loading. Most of the ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 data sheet specifications assume a 5 k resistive load to ground at the DAC output. As the output is forced to source or sink more current, the nonlinear regions at the top or bottom (respectively) of Figure 64 become larger. With larger current demands, this can significantly limit output voltage swing. The ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 integrate voltage comparators. The positive input is multiplexed with ADC2, and the negative input has two options: ADC3 and DAC0. The output of the comparator can be configured to generate a system interrupt, be routed directly to the programmable logic array, start an ADC conversion, or be on an external pin, CMPOUT, as shown in Figure 65. IRQ ADC2/CMP0 MUX ADC3/CMP1 MUX DAC0 POWER SUPPLY MONITOR The power supply monitor regulates the IOVDD supply on the ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29. It indicates when the IOVDD supply pin drops below one of two supply trip points. The monitor function is controlled via the PSMCON register. If enabled in the IRQEN or FIQEN register, the monitor interrupts the core using the PSMI bit in the PSMCON MMR. This bit is immediately cleared after CMP goes high. This monitor function allows the user to save working registers to avoid possible data loss due to low supply or brown-out conditions. It also ensures that normal code execution does not resume until a safe supply level is established. P0.0/CMPOUT 04955-025 0x00000000 04955-024 100mV Figure 65. Comparator Note that because the ADuC7022, ADuC7025, and ADu7027 parts do not support a DAC0 output, it is not possible to use DAC0 as a comparator input on these parts. Hysteresis Figure 66 shows how the input offset voltage and hysteresis terms are defined. CMPOUT VH VH Name PSMCON Address 0xFFFF0440 Default Value 0x0008 Access R/W VOS CMP0 04955-063 Table 53. PSMCON Register Figure 66. Comparator Hysteresis Transfer Function Rev. G | Page 57 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Comparator Interface The comparator interface consists of a 16-bit MMR, CMPCON, which is described in Table 56. Table 55. CMPCON Register Name CMPCON Address 0xFFFF0444 Default Value 0x0000 Access R/W Table 56. CMPCON MMR Bit Descriptions Bit 15:11 10 Name 9:8 CMPIN Value CMPEN 00 01 10 11 7:6 CMPOC 00 01 10 11 5 4:3 CMPOL CMPRES 00 11 01/10 2 1 0 CMPHYST CMPORI CMPOFI Description Reserved. Comparator enable bit. Set by user to enable the comparator. Cleared by user to disable the comparator. Comparator negative input select bits. AVDD/2. ADC3 input. DAC0 output. Reserved. Comparator output configuration bits. Reserved. Reserved. Output on CMPOUT. IRQ. Comparator output logic state bit. When low, the comparator output is high if the positive input (CMP0) is above the negative input (CMP1). When high, the comparator output is high if the positive input is below the negative input. Response time. 5 s response time is typical for large signals (2.5 V differential). 17 s response time is typical for small signals (0.65 mV differential). 3 s typical. Reserved. Comparator hysteresis bit. Set by user to have a hysteresis of about 7.5 mV. Cleared by user to have no hysteresis. Comparator output rising edge interrupt. Set automatically when a rising edge occurs on the monitored voltage (CMP0). Cleared by user by writing a 1 to this bit. Comparator output falling edge interrupt. Set automatically when a falling edge occurs on the monitored voltage (CMP0). Cleared by user. OSCILLATOR AND PLL--POWER CONTROL Clocking System Each ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 integrates a 32.768 kHz 3% oscillator, a clock divider, and a PLL. The PLL locks onto a multiple (1275) of the internal oscillator or an external 32.768 kHz crystal to provide a stable 41.78 MHz clock (UCLK) for the system. To allow power saving, the core can operate at this frequency, or at binary submultiples of it. The actual core operating frequency, UCLK/2CD, is refered to as HCLK. The default core clock is the PLL clock divided by 8 (CD = 3) or 5.22 MHz. The core clock frequency can also come from an external clock on the ECLK pin as described in Figure 67. The core clock can be outputted on ECLK when using an internal oscillator or external crystal. Note that when the ECLK pin is used to output the core clock, the output signal is not buffered and is not suitable for use as a clock source to an external device without an external buffer. WATCHDOG TIMER INT. 32kHz* OSCILLATOR XCLKO CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR XCLKI OCLK WAKE-UP TIMER AT POWER-UP 32.768kHz 41.78MHz PLL P0.7/XCLK MDCLK UCLK I2C CD CORE ANALOG PERIPHERALS /2CD HCLK *32.768kHz 3% P0.7/ECLK 04955-026 Input offset voltage (VOS) is the difference between the center of the hysteresis range and the ground level. This can either be positive or negative. The hysteresis voltage (VH) is one-half the width of the hysteresis range. Data Sheet Figure 67. Clocking System The selection of the clock source is in the PLLCON register. By default, the part uses the internal oscillator feeding the PLL. External Crystal Selection To switch to an external crystal, the user must do the following: 1. 2. 3. Rev. G | Page 58 of 101 Enable the Timer2 interrupt and configure it for a timeout period of >120 s. Follow the write sequence to the PLLCON register, setting the MDCLK bits to 01 and clearing the OSEL bit. Force the part into NAP mode by following the correct write sequence to the POWCON register. When the part is interrupted from NAP mode by the Timer2 interrupt source, the clock source has switched to the external clock. Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Example source code Example source code t2val_old= T2VAL; t2val_old= T2VAL; T2LD = 5; T2LD = 5; TCON = 0x480; TCON = 0x480; while ((T2VAL == t2val_old) || (T2VAL > 3)) //ensures timer value loaded while ((T2VAL == t2val_old) || (T2VAL > 3)) //ensures timer value loaded IRQEN = 0x10; //enable T2 interrupt IRQEN = 0x10; //enable T2 interrupt PLLKEY1 = 0xAA; PLLCON = 0x01; PLLKEY2 = 0x55; PLLKEY1 = 0xAA; PLLCON = 0x03; //Select external clock PLLKEY2 = 0x55; POWKEY1 = 0x01; POWCON = 0x27; // Set Core into Nap mode POWKEY2 = 0xF4; In noisy environments, noise can couple to the external crystal pins, and PLL may lose lock momentarily. A PLL interrupt is provided in the interrupt controller. The core clock is immediately halted, and this interrupt is only serviced when the lock is restored. In case of crystal loss, the watchdog timer should be used. During initialization, a test on the RSTSTA register can determine if the reset came from the watchdog timer. External Clock Selection To switch to an external clock on P0.7, configure P0.7 in Mode 1. The external clock can be up to 44 MHz, providing the tolerance is 1%. POWKEY1 = 0x01; POWCON = 0x27; // Set Core into Nap mode POWKEY2 = 0xF4; Power Control System A choice of operating modes is available on the ADuC7019/20/ 21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29. Table 57 describes what part is powered on in the different modes and indicates the power-up time. Table 58 gives some typical values of the total current consumption (analog + digital supply currents) in the different modes, depending on the clock divider bits. The ADC is turned off. Note that these values also include current consumption of the regulator and other parts on the test board where these values are measured. Table 57. Operating Modes1 Mode Active Pause Nap Sleep Stop 1 Core X Peripherals X X PLL X X X XTAL/T2/T3 X X X X IRQ0 to IRQ3 X X X X X Start-Up/Power-On Time 130 ms at CD = 0 24 ns at CD = 0; 3 s at CD = 7 24 ns at CD = 0; 3 s at CD = 7 1.58 ms 1.7 ms X indicates that the part is powered on. Table 58. Typical Current Consumption at 25C in Milliamperes PC[2:0] 000 001 010 011 100 Mode Active Pause Nap Sleep Stop CD = 0 33.1 22.7 3.8 0.4 0.4 CD = 1 21.2 13.3 3.8 0.4 0.4 CD = 2 13.8 8.5 3.8 0.4 0.4 CD = 3 10 6.1 3.8 0.4 0.4 Rev. G | Page 59 of 101 CD = 4 8.1 4.9 3.8 0.4 0.4 CD = 5 7.2 4.3 3.8 0.4 0.4 CD = 6 6.7 4 3.8 0.4 0.4 CD = 7 6.45 3.85 3.8 0.4 0.4 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet MMRs and Keys Table 63. POWCON Register The operating mode, clocking mode, and programmable clock divider are controlled via two MMRs: PLLCON (see Table 61) and POWCON (see Table 64). PLLCON controls the operating mode of the clock system, whereas POWCON controls the core clock frequency and the power-down mode. Name POWCON To prevent accidental programming, a certain sequence (see Table 65) must be followed to write to the PLLCON and POWCON registers. Address 0xFFFF0410 0xFFFF0418 Default Value 0x0000 0x0000 Bit 7 6:4 Name Name PLLCON Address 0xFFFF0414 000 001 010 011 100 Others Default Value 0x21 Access R/W 3 2:0 4:2 1:0 Name Value OSEL MDCLK 00 01 10 11 Description Reserved. 32 kHz PLL input selection. Set by user to select the internal 32 kHz oscillator. Set by default. Cleared by user to select the external 32 kHz crystal. Reserved. Clocking modes. Reserved. PLL. Default configuration. Reserved. External clock on the P0.7 pin. Address 0xFFFF0404 0xFFFF040C Default Value 0x0000 0x0000 Access R/W Description Reserved. Operating modes. Active mode. Pause mode. Nap. Sleep mode. IRQ0 to IRQ3 and Timer2 can wake up the part. Stop mode. IRQ0 to IRQ3 can wake up the part. Reserved. Reserved. CPU clock divider bits. 41.78 MHz. 20.89 MHz. 10.44 MHz. 5.22 MHz. 2.61 MHz. 1.31 MHz. 653 kHz. 326 kHz. Table 65. PLLCON and POWCON Write Sequence PLLCON PLLKEY1 = 0xAA PLLCON = 0x01 PLLKEY2 = 0x55 Table 62. POWKEYx Registers Name POWKEY1 POWKEY2 CD 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Table 61. PLLCON MMR Bit Designations Bit 7:6 5 Value PC Access W W Table 60. PLLCON Register Default Value 0x0003 Table 64. POWCON MMR Bit Designations Table 59. PLLKEYx Registers Name PLLKEY1 PLLKEY2 Address 0xFFFF0408 Access W W Rev. G | Page 60 of 101 POWCON POWKEY1 = 0x01 POWCON = user value POWKEY2 = 0xF4 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 DIGITAL PERIPHERALS 3-PHASE PWM Each ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 provides a flexible and programmable, 3-phase pulse-width modulation (PWM) waveform generator. It can be programmed to generate the required switching patterns to drive a 3-phase voltage source inverter for ac induction motor control (ACIM). Note that only active high patterns can be produced. The PWM generator produces three pairs of PWM signals on the six PWM output pins (PWM0H, PWM0L, PWM1H, PWM1L, PWM2H, and PWM2L). The six PWM output signals consist of three high-side drive signals and three low-side drive signals. The switching frequency and dead time of the generated PWM patterns are programmable using the PWMDAT0 and PWMDAT1 MMRs. In addition, three duty-cycle control registers (PWMCH0, PWMCH1, and PWMCH2) directly control the duty cycles of the three pairs of PWM signals. Each of the six PWM output signals can be enabled or disabled by separate output enable bits of the PWMEN register. In addition, three control bits of the PWMEN register permit crossover of the two signals of a PWM pair. In crossover mode, the PWM signal destined for the high-side switch is diverted to the complementary low-side output. The signal destined for the low-side switch is diverted to the corresponding high-side output signal. In many applications, there is a need to provide an isolation barrier in the gate-drive circuits that turn on the inverter power devices. In general, there are two common isolation techniques: optical isolation using optocouplers and transformer isolation using pulse transformers. The PWM controller permits mixing of the output PWM signals with a high frequency chopping signal to permit easy interface to such pulse transformers. The features of this gate-drive chopping mode can be controlled by the PWMCFG register. An 8-bit value within the PWMCFG register directly controls the chopping frequency. High frequency chopping can be independently enabled for the highside and low-side outputs using separate control bits in the PWMCFG register. The PWM generator can operate in one of two distinct modes: single update mode or double update mode. In single update mode, the duty cycle values are programmable only once per PWM period so that the resulting PWM patterns are symmetrical about the midpoint of the PWM period. In the double update mode, a second updating of the PWM duty cycle values is implemented at the midpoint of the PWM period. In double update mode, it is also possible to produce asymmetrical PWM patterns that produce lower harmonic distortion in 3-phase PWM inverters. This technique permits closed-loop controllers to change the average voltage applied to the machine windings at a faster rate. As a result, faster closed-loop bandwidths are achieved. The operating mode of the PWM block is selected by a control bit in the PWMCON register. In single update mode, an internal synchronization pulse, PWMSYNC, is produced at the start of each PWM period. In double update mode, an additional PWMSYNC pulse is produced at the midpoint of each PWM period. The PWM block can also provide an internal synchronization pulse on the PWMSYNC pin that is synchronized to the PWM switching frequency. In single update mode, a pulse is produced at the start of each PWM period. In double update mode, an additional pulse is produced at the mid-point of each PWM period. The width of the pulse is programmable through the PWMDAT2 register. The PWM block can also accept an external synchronization pulse on the PWMSYNC pin. The selection of external synchronization or internal synchronization is in the PWMCON register. The SYNC input timing can be synchronized to the internal peripheral clock, which is selected in the PWMCON register. If the external synchronization pulse from the chip pin is asynchronous to the internal peripheral clock (typical case), the external PWMSYNC is considered asynchronous and should be synchronized. The synchronization logic adds latency and jitter from the external pulse to the actual PWM outputs. The size of the pulse on the PWMSYNC pin must be greater than two core clock periods. The PWM signals produced by the ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/ 26/27/28/29 can be shut off via a dedicated asynchronous PWM shutdown pin, PWMTRIP. When brought low, PWMTRIP instantaneously places all six PWM outputs in the off state (high). This hardware shutdown mechanism is asynchronous so that the associated PWM disable circuitry does not go through any clocked logic. This ensures correct PWM shutdown even in the event of a core clock loss. Status information about the PWM system is available to the user in the PWMSTA register. In particular, the state of the PWMTRIP pin is available, as well as a status bit that indicates whether operation is in the first half or the second half of the PWM period. 40-Pin Package Devices On the 40-pin package devices, the PWM outputs are not directly accessible, as described in the General-Purpose Input/Output section. One channel can be brought out on a GPIO (see Table 78) via the PLA as shown in the following example: PWMCON = 0x1; PWMDAT0 = 0x055F; // enables PWM o/p // PWM switching freq // Configure Port Pins GP4CON = 0x300; // P4.2 as PLA output GP3CON = 0x1; // P3.0 configured as // output of PWM0 //(internally) // PWM0 onto P4.2 PLAELM8 = 0x0035; PLAELM10 = 0x0059; Rev. G | Page 61 of 101 // P3.0 (PWM output) // input of element 8 // PWM from element 8 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 DESCRIPTION OF THE PWM BLOCK A functional block diagram of the PWM controller is shown in Figure 68. The generation of the six output PWM signals on Pin PWM0H to Pin PWM2L is controlled by the following four important blocks: The 3-phase PWM timing unit. The core of the PWM controller, this block generates three pairs of complemented and dead-time-adjusted, center-based PWM signals. This unit also generates the internal synchronization pulse, PWMSYNC. It also controls whether the external PWMSYNC pin is used. The output control unit. This block can redirect the outputs of the 3-phase timing unit for each channel to either the high-side or low-side output. In addition, the output control unit allows individual enabling/disabling of each of the six PWM output signals. The gate drive unit. This block can generate the high frequency chopping and its subsequent mixing with the PWM signals. The PWM shutdown controller. This block controls the PWM shutdown via the PWMTRIP pin and generates the correct reset signal for the timing unit. The PWM controller is driven by the ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/ 25/26/27/28/29 core clock frequency and is capable of generating two interrupts to the ARM core. One interrupt is generated on the occurrence of a PWMSYNC pulse, and the other is generated on the occurrence of any PWM shutdown action. 3-Phase Timing Unit PWM Switching Frequency (PWMDAT0 MMR) The PWM switching frequency is controlled by the PWM period register, PWMDAT0. The fundamental timing unit of the PWM controller is Therefore, the PWM switching period, tS, can be written as tS = 2 x PWMDAT0 x tCORE The largest value that can be written to the 16-bit PWMDAT0 MMR is 0xFFFF = 65,535, which corresponds to a minimum PWM switching frequency of fPWM(min) = 41.78 x 106/(2 x 65,535) = 318.75 Hz Note that PWMDAT0 values of 0 and 1 are not defined and should not be used. PWM Switching Dead Time (PWMDAT1 MMR) The second important parameter that must be set up in the initial configuration of the PWM block is the switching dead time. This is a short delay time introduced between turning off one PWM signal (0H, for example) and turning on the complementary signal (0L). This short time delay is introduced to permit the power switch to be turned off (in this case, 0H) to completely recover its blocking capability before the complementary switch is turned on. This time delay prevents a potentially destructive short-circuit condition from developing across the dc link capacitor of a typical voltage source inverter. The dead time is controlled by the 10-bit, read/write PWMDAT1 register. There is only one dead-time register that controls the dead time inserted into all three pairs of PWM output signals. The dead time, tD, is related to the value in the PWMDAT1 register by Therefore, a PWMDAT1 value of 0x00A (= 10), introduces a 426 ns delay between the turn-off on any PWM signal (0H, for example) and the turn-on of its complementary signal (0L). The amount of the dead time can, therefore, be programmed in increments of 2tCORE (or 49 ns for a 41.78 MHz core clock). where fCORE is the core frequency of the MicroConverter. CONFIGURATION REGISTERS DUTY CYCLE REGISTERS PWMCON PWMDAT0 PWMCH0 PWMDAT1 PWMCH1 PWMDAT2 PWMCH2 CORE CLOCK PWMDAT0 = fCORE/(2 x fPWM) tD = PWMDAT1 x 2 x tCORE tCORE = 1/fCORE PWM SHUTDOWN CONTROLLER Therefore, for a 41.78 MHz fCORE, the fundamental time increment is 24 ns. The value written to the PWMDAT0 register is effectively the number of fCORE clock increments in one-half a PWM period. The required PWMDAT0 value is a function of the desired PWM switching frequency (fPWN) and is given by 3-PHASE PWM TIMING UNIT PWMEN PWMCFG OUTPUT CONTROL UNIT GATE DRIVE UNIT PWM0H PWM0L PWM1H PWM1L PWM2H PWM2L SYNC PWMSYNC TO INTERRUPT CONTROLLER PWMTRIP Figure 68. Overview of the PWM Controller Rev. G | Page 62 of 101 04955-027 Data Sheet Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 The PWMDAT1 register is a 10-bit register with a maximum value of 0x3FF (= 1023), which corresponds to a maximum programmed dead time of The advantage of double update mode is that lower harmonic voltages can be produced by the PWM process, and faster control bandwidths are possible. However, for a given PWM switching frequency, the PWMSYNC pulses occur at twice the rate in the double update mode. Because new duty cycle values must be computed in each PWMSYNC interrupt service routine, there is a larger computational burden on the ARM core in double update mode. for a core clock of 41.78 MHz. The dead time can be programmed to be zero by writing 0 to the PWMDAT1 register. PWM Operating Mode (PWMCON and PWMSTA MMRs) As discussed in the 3-Phase PWM section, the PWM controller of the ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 can operate in two distinct modes: single update mode and double update mode. The operating mode of the PWM controller is determined by the state of Bit 2 of the PWMCON register. If this bit is cleared, the PWM operates in the single update mode. Setting Bit 2 places the PWM in the double update mode. The default operating mode is single update mode. In single update mode, a single PWMSYNC pulse is produced in each PWM period. The rising edge of this signal marks the start of a new PWM cycle and is used to latch new values from the PWM configuration registers (PWMDAT0 and PWMDAT1) and the PWM duty cycle registers (PWMCH0, PWMCH1, and PWMCH2) into the 3-phase timing unit. In addition, the PWMEN register is latched into the output control unit on the rising edge of the PWMSYNC pulse. In effect, this means that the characteristics and resulting duty cycles of the PWM signals can be updated only once per PWM period at the start of each cycle. The result is symmetrical PWM patterns about the midpoint of the switching period. In double update mode, there is an additional PWMSYNC pulse produced at the midpoint of each PWM period. The rising edge of this new PWMSYNC pulse is again used to latch new values of the PWM configuration registers, duty cycle registers, and the PWMEN register. As a result, it is possible to alter both the characteristics (switching frequency and dead time) as well as the output duty cycles at the midpoint of each PWM cycle. Consequently, it is also possible to produce PWM switching patterns that are no longer symmetrical about the midpoint of the period (asymmetrical PWM patterns). In double update mode, it could be necessary to know whether operation at any point in time is in either the first half or the second half of the PWM cycle. This information is provided by Bit 0 of the PWMSTA register, which is cleared during operation in the first half of each PWM period (between the rising edge of the original PWMSYNC pulse and the rising edge of the new PWMSYNC pulse introduced in double update mode). Bit 0 of the PWMSTA register is set during operation in the second half of each PWM period. This status bit allows the user to make a determination of the particular half cycle during implementation of the PWMSYNC interrupt service routine, if required. PWM Duty Cycles (PWMCH0, PWMCH1, and PWMCH2 MMRs) The duty cycles of the six PWM output signals on Pin PWM0H to Pin PWM2L are controlled by the three 16-bit read/write duty cycle registers, PWMCH0, PWMCH1, and PWMCH2. The duty cycle registers are programmed in integer counts of the fundamental time unit, tCORE. They define the desired on time of the high-side PWM signal produced by the 3-phase timing unit over half the PWM period. The switching signals produced by the 3-phase timing unit are also adjusted to incorporate the programmed dead time value in the PWMDAT1 register. The 3-phase timing unit produces active high signals so that a high level corresponds to a command to turn on the associated power device. Figure 69 shows a typical pair of PWM outputs (in this case, 0H and 0L) from the timing unit in single update mode. All illustrated time values indicate the integer value in the associated register and can be converted to time by simply multiplying by the fundamental time increment, tCORE. Note that the switching patterns are perfectly symmetrical about the midpoint of the switching period in this mode because the same values of PWMCH0, PWMDAT0, and PWMDAT1 are used to define the signals in both half cycles of the period. Figure 69 also demonstrates how the programmed duty cycles are adjusted to incorporate the desired dead time into the resulting pair of PWM signals. The dead time is incorporated by moving the switching instants of both PWM signals (0H and 0L) away from the instant set by the PWMCH0 register. -PWMDAT0 / 2 0 +PWMDAT0 / 2 0 -PWMDAT0 / 2 PWMCH0 PWMCH0 0H 2 x PWMDAT1 2 x PWMDAT1 0L PWMDAT2 + 1 PWMSYNC PWMSTA (0) Rev. G | Page 63 of 101 PWMDAT0 PWMDAT0 Figure 69. Typical PWM Outputs of the 3-Phase Timing Unit (Single Update Mode) 04955-028 tD(max) = 1023 x 2 x tCORE = 1023 x 2 x 24 x10-9 = 48.97 s ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Both switching edges are moved by an equal amount (PWMDAT1 x tCORE) to preserve the symmetrical output patterns. Data Sheet In general, the on times of the PWM signals in double update mode can be defined as follows: On the high side Also shown are the PWMSYNC pulse and Bit 0 of the PWMSTA register, which indicates whether operation is in the first or second half cycle of the PWM period. The resulting on times of the PWM signals over the full PWM period (two half periods) produced by the timing unit can be written as follows: On the high side t0HH = PWMDAT0 + 2(PWMCH0 - PWMDAT1) x tCORE t0HH = (PWMDAT01/2 + PWMDAT02/2 + PWMCH01 + PWMCH02 - PWMDAT11 - PWMDAT12) x tCORE t0HL = (PWMDAT01/2 + PWMDAT02/2 - PWMCH01 - PWMCH02 + PWMDAT11 + PWMDAT12) x tCORE where Subscript 1 refers to the value of that register during the first half cycle, and Subscript 2 refers to the value during the second half cycle. The corresponding duty cycles (d) are t0HL = PWMDAT0 - 2(PWMCH0 - PWMDAT1) x tCORE d0H = t0HH/tS = (PWMDAT01/2 + PWMDAT02/2 + PWMCH01 + PWMCH02 - PWMDAT11 - PWMDAT12)/ (PWMDAT01 + PWMDAT02) and the corresponding duty cycles (d) d0H = t0HH/tS = 1/2 + (PWMCH0 - PWMDAT1)/PWMDAT0 On the low side and on the low side t0LH = (PWMDAT01/2 + PWMDAT02/2 + PWMCH01 + t0LH = PWMDAT0 - 2(PWMCH0 + PWMDAT1) x tCORE PWMCH02 + PWMDAT11 + PWMDAT12) x tCORE t0LL = PWMDAT0 + 2(PWMCH0 + PWMDAT1) x tCORE t0LL = (PWMDAT01/2 + PWMDAT02/2 - PWMCH01 - PWMCH02 - PWMDAT11 - PWMDAT12) x tCORE and the corresponding duty cycles (d) dOL = t0LH/tS = 1/2 - (PWMCH0 + PWMDAT1)/PWMDAT0 The minimum permissible t0H and t0L values are zero, corresponding to a 0% duty cycle. In a similar fashion, the maximum value is tS, corresponding to a 100% duty cycle. The corresponding duty cycles (d) are Figure 70 shows the output signals from the timing unit for operation in double update mode. It illustrates a general case where the switching frequency, dead time, and duty cycle are all changed in the second half of the PWM period. The same value for any or all of these quantities can be used in both halves of the PWM cycle. However, there is no guarantee that symmetrical PWM signals are produced by the timing unit in double update mode. Figure 70 also shows that the dead time insertions into the PWM signals are done in the same way as in single update mode. 0 -PWMDAT01 / 2 -PWMDAT02 / 2 +PWMDAT01 / 2 PWMCH01 +PWMDAT02 / 2 0 PWMCH02 0H 2 x PWMDAT11 2 x PWMDAT12 0L PWMSYNC PWMDAT21 + 1 PWMDAT22 + 1 PWMDAT02 Figure 70. Typical PWM Outputs of the 3-Phase Timing Unit (Double Update Mode) 04955-029 PWMSTA (0) PWMDAT01 where Subscript 1 refers to the value of that register during the first half cycle, and Subscript 2 refers to the value during the second half cycle. d0L = t0LH/tS = (PWMDAT01/2 + PWMDAT02/2 + PWMCH01 + PWMCH02 + PWMDAT11 + PWMDAT12)/(PWMDAT01 + PWMDAT02) For the completely general case in double update mode (see Figure 70), the switching period is given by tS = (PWMDAT01 + PWMDAT02) x tCORE Again, the values of t0H and t0L are constrained to lie between zero and tS. PWM signals similar to those illustrated in Figure 69 and Figure 70 can be produced on the 1H, 1L, 2H, and 2L outputs by programming the PWMCH1 and PWMCH2 registers in a manner identical to that described for PWMCH0. The PWM controller does not produce any PWM outputs until all of the PWMDAT0, PWMCH0, PWMCH1, and PWMCH2 registers have been written to at least once. When these registers are written, internal counting of the timers in the 3-phase timing unit is enabled. Writing to the PWMDAT0 register starts the internal timing of the main PWM timer. Provided that the PWMDAT0 register is written to prior to the PWMCH0, PWMCH1, and PWMCH2 registers in the initialization, the first PWMSYNC pulse and interrupt (if enabled) appear 1.5 x tCORE x PWMDAT0 seconds after the initial write to the PWMDAT0 register in single update mode. In double update mode, the first PWMSYNC pulse appears after PWMDAT0 x tCORE seconds. Rev. G | Page 64 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 PWMCH0 = PWMCH0 = PWMCH1 PWMCH1 Output Control Unit Following a reset, all six enable bits of the PWMEN register are cleared, and all PWM outputs are enabled by default. In a manner identical to the duty cycle registers, the PWMEN is latched on the rising edge of the PWMSYNC signal. As a result, changes to this register become effective only at the start of each PWM cycle in single update mode. In double update mode, the PWMEN register can also be updated at the midpoint of the PWM cycle. In the control of an ECM, only two inverter legs are switched at any time, and often the high-side device in one leg must be switched on at the same time as the low-side driver in a second leg. Therefore, by programming identical duty cycle values for two PWM channels (for example, PWMCH0 = PWMCH1) and setting Bit 7 of the PWMEN register to cross over the 1H/1L pair of PWM signals, it is possible to turn on the high-side switch of Phase A and the low-side switch of Phase B at the same time. In the control of ECM, it is usual for the third inverter leg (Phase C in this example) to be disabled for a number of PWM cycles. This function is implemented by disabling both the 2H and 2L PWM outputs by setting Bit 0 and Bit 1 of the PWMEN register. 0H 2 x PWMDAT1 2 x PWMDAT1 0L 1H 1L 2H 2L PWMDAT0 PWMDAT0 04955-030 The operation of the output control unit is controlled by the 9-bit read/write PWMEN register. This register controls two distinct features of the output control unit that are directly useful in the control of electronic counter measures (ECM) or binary decimal counter measures (BDCM). The PWMEN register contains three crossover bits, one for each pair of PWM outputs. Setting Bit 8 of the PWMEN register enables the crossover mode for the 0H/0L pair of PWM signals, setting Bit 7 enables crossover on the 1H/1L pair of PWM signals, and setting Bit 6 enables crossover on the 2H/2L pair of PWM signals. If crossover mode is enabled for any pair of PWM signals, the high-side PWM signal from the timing unit (0H, for example) is diverted to the associated low-side output of the output control unit so that the signal ultimately appears at the PWM0L pin. Of course, the corresponding low-side output of the timing unit is also diverted to the complementary high-side output of the output control unit so that the signal appears at the PWM0H pin. Following a reset, the three crossover bits are cleared, and the crossover mode is disabled on all three pairs of PWM signals. The PWMEN register also contains six bits (Bit 0 to Bit 5) that can be used to individually enable or disable each of the six PWM outputs. If the associated bit of the PWMEN register is set, the corresponding PWM output is disabled regardless of the corresponding value of the duty cycle register. This PWM output signal remains in the off state as long as the corresponding enable/disable bit of the PWMEN register is set. The implementation of this output enable function is implemented after the crossover function. Figure 71. Active Low PWM Signals Suitable for ECM Control, PWMCH0 = PWMCH1, Crossover 1H/1L Pair and Disable 0L, 1H, 2H, and 2L Outputs in Single Update Mode. In addition, the other four signals (0L, 1H, 2H, and 2L) have been disabled by setting the appropriate enable/disable bits of the PWMEN register. In Figure 71, the appropriate value for the PWMEN register is 0x00A7. In normal ECM operation, each inverter leg is disabled for certain periods of time to change the PWMEN register based on the position of the rotor shaft (motor commutation). Gate Drive Unit The gate drive unit of the PWM controller adds features that simplify the design of isolated gate-drive circuits for PWM inverters. If a transformer-coupled, power device, gate-drive amplifier is used, the active PWM signal must be chopped at a high frequency. The 16-bit read/write PWMCFG register programs this high frequency chopping mode. The chopped active PWM signals can be required for the high-side drivers only, the low-side drivers only, or both the high-side and lowside switches. Therefore, independent control of this mode for both high-side and low-side switches is included with two separate control bits in the PWMCFG register. Typical PWM output signals with high frequency chopping enabled on both high-side and low-side signals are shown in Figure 72. Chopping of the high-side PWM outputs (0H, 1H, and 2H) is enabled by setting Bit 8 of the PWMCFG register. Chopping of the low-side PWM outputs (0L, 1L, and 2L) is enabled by setting Bit 9 of the PWMCFG register. The high chopping frequency is controlled by the 8-bit word (GDCLK) placed in Bit 0 to Bit 7 of the PWMCFG register. The period of this high frequency carrier is tCHOP = (4 x (GDCLK + 1)) x tCORE The chopping frequency is, therefore, an integral subdivision of the MicroConverter core frequency This situation is illustrated in Figure 71, where it can be seen that both the 0H and 1L signals are identical because PWMCH0 = PWMCH1 and the crossover bit for Phase B is set. Rev. G | Page 65 of 101 fCHOP = fCORE/(4 x (GDCLK + 1)) ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 The GDCLK value can range from 0 to 255, corresponding to a programmable chopping frequency rate of 40.8 kHz to 10.44 MHz for a 41.78 MHz core frequency. The gate drive features must be programmed before operation of the PWM controller and are typically not changed during normal operation of the PWM controller. Following a reset, all bits of the PWMCFG register are cleared so that high frequency chopping is disabled, by default. PWMCH0 PWMCH0 Data Sheet PWM MMRs Interface The PWM block is controlled via the MMRs described in this section. Table 66. PWMCON Register Name PWMCON Address 0xFFFFFC00 Default Value 0x0000 Access R/W PWMCON is a control register that enables the PWM and chooses the update rate. 0L Table 67. PWMCON MMR Bit Descriptions 2 x PWMDAT1 2 x PWMDAT1 0H PWMDAT0 04955-031 4 x (GDCLK + 1) x tCORE PWMDAT0 Bit 7:5 4 Name 3 PWM_EXTSYNC 2 PWMDBL 1 PWM_SYNC_EN 0 PWMEN PWM_SYNCSEL Figure 72. Typical PWM Signals with High Frequency Gate Chopping Enabled on Both High-Side and Low-Side Switches PWM Shutdown In the event of external fault conditions, it is essential that the PWM system be instantaneously shut down in a safe fashion. A low level on the PWMTRIP pin provides an instantaneous, asynchronous (independent of the MicroConverter core clock) shutdown of the PWM controller. All six PWM outputs are placed in the off state, that is, in low state. In addition, the PWMSYNC pulse is disabled. The PWMTRIP pin has an internal pull-down resistor to disable the PWM if the pin becomes disconnected. The state of the PWMTRIP pin can be read from Bit 3 of the PWMSTA register. If a PWM shutdown command occurs, a PWMTRIP interrupt is generated, and internal timing of the 3-phase timing unit of the PWM controller is stopped. Following a PWM shutdown, the PWM can be reenabled (in a PWMTRIP interrupt service routine, for example) only by writing to all of the PWMDAT0, PWMCH0, PWMCH1, and PWMCH2 registers. Provided that the external fault is cleared and the PWMTRIP is returned to a high level, the internal timing of the 3-phase timing unit resumes, and new duty-cycle values are latched on the next PWMSYNC boundary. Note that the PWMTRIP interrupt is available in IRQ only, and the PWMSYNC interrupt is available in FIQ only. Both interrupts share the same bit in the interrupt controller. Therefore, only one of the interrupts can be used at a time. See the Interrupt System section for further details. Description Reserved. External sync select. Set to use external sync. Cleared to use internal sync. External sync select. Set to select external synchronous sync signal. Cleared for asynchronous sync signal. Double update mode. Set to 1 by user to enable double update mode. Cleared to 0 by the user to enable single update mode. PWM synchronization enable. Set by user to enable synchronization. Cleared by user to disable synchronization. PWM enable bit. Set to 1 by user to enable the PWM. Cleared to 0 by user to disable the PWM. Also cleared automatically with PWMTRIP (PWMSTA MMR). Table 68. PWMSTA Register Name PWMSTA Address 0xFFFFFC04 Default Value 0x0000 Access R/W PWMSTA reflects the status of the PWM. Table 69. PWMSTA MMR Bit Descriptions Bit 15:10 9 Name 8 PWMTRIPINT 3 2:1 0 PWMTRIP Rev. G | Page 66 of 101 PWMSYNCINT PWMPHASE Description Reserved. PWM sync interrupt bit. Writing a 1 to this bit clears this interrupt. PWM trip interrupt bit. Writing a 1 to this bit clears this interrupt. Raw signal from the PWMTRIP pin. Reserved. PWM phase bit. Set to 1 by the MicroConverter when the timer is counting down (first half). Cleared to 0 by the MicroConverter when the timer is counting up (second half). Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Table 70. PWMCFG Register Table 74. PWMDAT0 Register Name PWMCFG Address 0xFFFFFC10 Default Value 0x0000 Access R/W Name PWMDAT0 Address 0xFFFFFC08 Default Value 0x0000 Access R/W PWMCFG is a gate chopping register. PWMDAT0 is an unsigned 16-bit register for switching period. Table 71. PWMCFG MMR Bit Descriptions Table 75. PWMDAT1 Register Bit 15:10 9 8 7:0 Name PWMDAT1 Name CHOPLO CHOPHI GDCLK Description Reserved. Low-side gate chopping enable bit. High-side gate chopping enable bit. PWM gate chopping period (unsigned). Table 72. PWMEN Register Name PWMEN Address 0xFFFFFC20 Default Value 0x0000 Access R/W PWMEN allows enabling of channel outputs and crossover. See its bit definitions in Table 73. Table 73. PWMEN MMR Bit Descriptions Bit 8 7 Name 0H0L_XOVR 1H1L_XOVR 6 2H2L_XOVR 5 0L_EN 4 0H_EN 3 1L_EN 2 1H_EN 1 2L_EN 0 2H_EN Description Channel 0 output crossover enable bit. Set to 1 by user to enable Channel 0 output crossover. Cleared to 0 by user to disable Channel 0 output crossover. Channel 1 output crossover enable bit. Set to 1 by user to enable Channel 1 output crossover. Cleared to 0 by user to disable Channel 1 output crossover. Channel 2 output crossover enable bit. Set to 1 by user to enable Channel 2 output crossover. Cleared to 0 by user to disable Channel 2 output crossover. 0L output enable bit. Set to 1 by user to disable the 0L output of the PWM. Cleared to 0 by user to enable the 0L output of the PWM. 0H output enable bit. Set to 1 by user to disable the 0H output of the PWM. Cleared to 0 by user to enable the 0H output of the PWM. 1L output enable bit. Set to 1 by user to disable the 1L output of the PWM. Cleared to 0 by user to enable the 1L output of the PWM. 1H Output Enable Bit. Set to 1 by user to disable the 1H output of the PWM. Cleared to 0 by user to enable the 1H output of the PWM. 2L output enable bit. Set to 1 by user to disable the 2L output of the PWM. Cleared to 0 by user to enable the 2L output of the PWM. 2H output enable bit. Set to 1 by user to disable the 2H output of the PWM. Cleared to 0 by user to enable the 2H output of the PWM. Address 0xFFFFFC0C Default Value 0x0000 Access R/W PWMDAT1 is an unsigned 10-bit register for dead time. Table 76. PWMCHx Registers Name PWMCH0 PWMCH1 PWMCH2 Address 0xFFFFFC14 0xFFFFFC18 0xFFFFFC1C Default Value 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 Access R/W R/W R/W PWMCH0, PWMCH1, and PWMCH2 are channel duty cycles for the three phases. Table 77. PWMDAT2 Register Name PWMDAT2 Address 0xFFFFFC24 Default Value 0x0000 Access R/W PWMDAT2 is an unsigned 10-bit register for PWM sync pulse width. GENERAL-PURPOSE INPUT/OUTPUT The ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 provide 40 general-purpose, bidirectional I/O (GPIO) pins. All I/O pins are 5 V tolerant, meaning the GPIOs support an input voltage of 5 V. In general, many of the GPIO pins have multiple functions (see Table 78 for the pin function definitions). By default, the GPIO pins are configured in GPIO mode. All GPIO pins have an internal pull-up resistor (of about 100 k), and their drive capability is 1.6 mA. Note that a maximum of 20 GPIOs can drive 1.6 mA at the same time. Using the GPxPAR registers, it is possible to enable/disable the pull-up resistors for the following ports: P0.0, P0.4, P0.5, P0.6, P0.7, and the eight GPIOs of P1. The 40 GPIOs are grouped in five ports, Port 0 to Port 4 (Port x). Each port is controlled by four or five MMRs. Note that the kernel changes P0.6 from its default configuration at reset (MRST) to GPIO mode. If MRST is used for external circuitry, an external pull-up resistor should be used to ensure that the level on P0.6 does not drop when the kernel switches mode. Otherwise, P0.6 goes low for the reset period. For example, if MRST is required for power-down, it can be reconfigured in GP0CON MMR. The input level of any GPIO can be read at any time in the GPxDAT MMR, even when the pin is configured in a mode other than GPIO. The PLA input is always active. When the ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 part enters a power-saving mode, the GPIO pins retain their state. Rev. G | Page 67 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 GPxCON are the Port x control registers, which select the function of each pin of Port x as described in Table 80. Table 78. GPIO Pin Function Descriptions Port 0 1 2 3 4 Pin P0.0 P0.1 P0.2 P0.3 P0.4 P0.5 P0.6 P0.7 P1.0 P1.1 P1.2 P1.3 P1.4 P1.5 P1.6 P1.7 00 GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO/IRQ0 GPIO/IRQ1 GPIO/T1 GPIO GPIO/T1 GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO/IRQ2 GPIO/IRQ3 GPIO GPIO P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 P2.3 P2.4 P2.5 P2.6 P2.7 P3.0 P3.1 P3.2 P3.3 P3.4 P3.5 P3.6 P3.7 P4.0 P4.1 P4.2 P4.3 P4.4 P4.5 P4.6 P4.7 GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO GPIO Configuration 01 10 CMP MS0 PWM2H BLE PWM2L BHE TRST A16 PWMTRIP MS1 ADCBUSY MS2 MRST ECLK/XCLK1 SIN SIN SCL0 SOUT SDA0 RTS SCL1 CTS SDA1 RI SCLK DCD MISO DSR MOSI DTR CS ADCBUSY PLAO[1] PLAO[2] PLAO[3] PLAO[4] PLAI[0] PLAI[1] PLAI[2] PLAI[3] PLAI[4] PLAI[5] PLAI[6] PLAO[0] CONVSTART2 PWM0H PWM0L PLAO[5] PLAO[6] PLAO[7] PWM0H PWM0L PWM1H PWM1L PWM0H PWM0L PWM1H PWM1L PWM2H PWM2L PWMTRIP PWMSYNC SOUT WS RS AE MS0 MS1 MS2 MS3 AD0 AD1 AD2 AD3 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7 AD8 AD9 AD10 AD11 AD12 AD13 AD14 AD15 11 PLAI[7] PLAI[8] PLAI[9] PLAI[10] PLAI[11] PLAI[12] PLAI[13] PLAI[14] PLAI[15] PLAO[8] PLAO[9] PLAO[10] PLAO[11] PLAO[12] PLAO[13] PLAO[14] PLAO[15] 1 When configured in Mode 1, P0.7 is ECLK by default, or core clock output. To configure it as a clock input, the MDCLK bits in PLLCON must be set to 11. 2 The CONVSTART signal is active in all modes of P2.0. Table 79. GPxCON Registers Name GP0CON GP1CON GP2CON GP3CON GP4CON Address 0xFFFFF400 0xFFFFF404 0xFFFFF408 0xFFFFF40C 0xFFFFF410 Default Value 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 Data Sheet Access R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Table 80. GPxCON MMR Bit Descriptions Bit 31:30 29:28 27:26 25:24 23:22 21:20 19:18 17:16 15:14 13:12 11:10 9:8 7:6 5:4 3:2 1:0 Description Reserved. Select function of the Px.7 pin. Reserved. Select function of the Px.6 pin. Reserved. Select function of the Px.5 pin. Reserved. Select function of the Px.4 pin. Reserved. Select function of the Px.3 pin. Reserved. Select function of the Px.2 pin. Reserved. Select function of the Px.1 pin. Reserved. Select function of the Px.0 pin. Table 81. GPxPAR Registers Name GP0PAR GP1PAR Address 0xFFFFF42C 0xFFFFF43C Default Value 0x20000000 0x00000000 Access R/W R/W GPxPAR program the parameters for Port 0 and Port 1. Note that the GPxDAT MMR must always be written after changing the GPxPAR MMR. Table 82. GPxPAR MMR Bit Descriptions Bit 31 30:29 28 27 26:25 24 23 22:21 20 19 18:17 16 15 14:13 12 11 10:9 8 7 6:5 4 3 2:1 0 Rev. G | Page 68 of 101 Description Reserved. Drive strength Px.7. Pull-Up Disable Px.7. Reserved. Drive strength Px.6. Pull-Up Disable Px.6. Reserved. Drive strength Px.5. Pull-Up Disable Px.5. Reserved. Drive strength Px.4. Pull-Up Disable Px.4. Reserved. Drive strength Px.3. Pull-Up Disable Px.3. Reserved. Drive strength Px.2. Pull-Up Disable Px.2. Reserved. Drive strength Px.1. Pull-Up Disable Px.1. Reserved. Drive strength Px.0. Pull-Up Disable Px.0. Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Table 83. GPIO Drive Strength Control Bits Descriptions Table 84. GPxPAR Control Bits Access Descriptions Control Bits Value 00 01 1x Bit 31 30 to 29 28 27 26 to 25 24 23 22 to 21 20 19 18 to 17 16 15 14 to 13 12 11 10 to 9 8 7 6 to 5 4 3 2 to 1 0 Description Medium drive strength. Low drive strength. High drive strength. 3.6 3.2 3.0 2.8 2.6 2.4 HIGH DRIVE STRENGTH MEDIUM DRIVE STRENGTH LOW DRIVE STRENGTH 2.2 2.0 -24 -18 -12 -6 0 6 LOAD CURRENT (mA) 12 18 24 04955-031 VOLTAGE ON EACH PIN (V) 3.4 Figure 73. Programmable Strength for High Level (Typical Values) 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 -0.1 -0.2 HIGH DRIVE STRENGTH MEDIUM DRIVE STRENGTH LOW DRIVE STRENGTH -0.3 -0.4 -24 -18 -12 -6 0 6 LOAD CURRENT (mA) 12 18 24 04955-032 VOLTAGE ON EACH PIN (V) 0.4 Figure 74. Programmable Strength for Low Level (Typical Values) The drive strength bits can be written to one time only after reset. More writing to related bits has no effect on changing drive strength. The GPIO drive strength and pull-up disable is not always adjustable for the GPIO port. Some control bits cannot be changed (see Table 84). Rev. G | Page 69 of 101 GP0PAR Reserved R/W R/W Reserved R/W R/W Reserved R/W R/W Reserved R (b00) R/W Reserved R (b00) R/W Reserved R (b00) R/W Reserved R (b00) R/W Reserved R (b00) R/W GP1PAR Reserved R/W R/W Reserved R/W R/W Reserved R (b00) R/W Reserved R (b00) R/W Reserved R (b00) R/W Reserved R (b00) R/W Reserved R (b00) R/W Reserved R (b00) R/W ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Table 90. GPxCLR MMR Bit Descriptions Table 85. GPxDAT Registers Name GP0DAT GP1DAT GP2DAT GP3DAT GP4DAT 1 Address 0xFFFFF420 0xFFFFF430 0xFFFFF440 0xFFFFF450 0xFFFFF460 Data Sheet Default Value1 0x000000XX 0x000000XX 0x000000XX 0x000000XX 0x000000XX Access R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W X = 0, 1, 2, or 3. Bit 31:24 23:16 15:0 Description Reserved. Data Port x clear bit. Set to 1 by user to clear bit on Port x; also clears the corresponding bit in the GPxDAT MMR. Cleared to 0 by user; does not affect the data out. Reserved. SERIAL PORT MUX GPxDAT are Port x configuration and data registers. They configure the direction of the GPIO pins of Port x, set the output value for the pins configured as output, and store the input value of the pins configured as input. The serial port mux multiplexes the serial port peripherals (an SPI, UART, and two I2Cs) and the programmable logic array (PLA) to a set of 10 GPIO pins. Each pin must be configured to one of its specific I/O functions as described in Table 91. Table 86. GPxDAT MMR Bit Descriptions Table 91. SPM Configuration Bit 31:24 23:16 15:8 7:0 Description Direction of the data. Set to 1 by user to configure the GPIO pin as an output. Cleared to 0 by user to configure the GPIO pin as an input. Port x data output. Reflect the state of Port x pins at reset (read only). Port x data input (read only). Table 87. GPxSET Registers Name GP0SET GP1SET GP2SET GP3SET GP4SET 1 Address 0xFFFFF424 0xFFFFF434 0xFFFFF444 0xFFFFF454 0xFFFFF464 Default Value1 0x000000XX 0x000000XX 0x000000XX 0x000000XX 0x000000XX Access W W W W W X = 0, 1, 2, or 3. GPxSET are data set Port x registers. 15:0 Description Reserved. Data Port x set bit. Set to 1 by user to set bit on Port x; also sets the corresponding bit in the GPxDAT MMR. Cleared to 0 by user; does not affect the data out. Reserved. Table 89. GPxCLR Registers Name GP0CLR GP1CLR GP2CLR GP3CLR GP4CLR 1 Address 0xFFFFF428 0xFFFFF438 0xFFFFF448 0xFFFFF458 0xFFFFF468 Default Value1 0x000000XX 0x000000XX 0x000000XX 0x000000XX 0x000000XX X = 0, 1, 2, or 3. GPxCLR are data clear Port x registers. UART/I2C/SPI (10) I2C0SCL I2C0SDA I2C1SCL I2C1SDA SCLK MISO MOSI CS SIN SOUT UART (01) SIN SOUT RTS CTS RI DCD DSR DTR ECLK/XCLK CONV PLA (11) PLAI[0] PLAI[1] PLAI[2] PLAI[3] PLAI[4] PLAI[5] PLAI[6] PLAO[0] PLAO[4] PLAO[5] Table 91 also details the mode for each of the SPMMUX pins. This configuration must be done via the GP0CON, GP1CON, and GP2CON MMRs. By default, these 10 pins are configured as GPIOs. UART SERIAL INTERFACE Table 88. GPxSET MMR Bit Descriptions Bit 31:24 23:16 SPMMUX SPM0 SPM1 SPM2 SPM3 SPM4 SPM5 SPM6 SPM7 SPM8 SPM9 GPIO (00) P1.0 P1.1 P1.2 P1.3 P1.4 P1.5 P1.6 P1.7 P0.7 P2.0 Access W W W W W The UART peripheral is a full-duplex, universal, asynchronous receiver/transmitter. It is fully compatible with the 16,450 serial port standard. The UART performs serial-to-parallel conversions on data characters received from a peripheral device or modem, and parallel-to-serial conversions on data characters received from the CPU. The UART includes a fractional divider for baud rate generation and has a network addressable mode. The UART function is made available on the 10 pins of the ADuC7019/20/ 21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 (see Table 92). Table 92. UART Signal Description Pin SPM0 (Mode 1) SPM1 (Mode 1) SPM2 (Mode 1) SPM3 (Mode 1) SPM4 (Mode 1) SPM5 (Mode 1) SPM6 (Mode 1) SPM7 (Mode 1) SPM8 (Mode 2) SPM9 (Mode 2) Rev. G | Page 70 of 101 Signal SIN SOUT RTS CTS RI DCD DSR DTR SIN SOUT Description Serial receive data. Serial transmit data. Request to send. Clear to send. Ring indicator. Data carrier detect. Data set ready. Data terminal ready. Serial receive data. Serial transmit data. Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 The serial communication adopts an asynchronous protocol, which supports various word lengths, stop bits, and parity generation options selectable in the configuration register. Baud Rate Generation There are two ways of generating the UART baud rate, normal 450 UART baud rate generation and the fractional divider. Normal 450 UART Baud Rate Generation The baud rate is a divided version of the core clock using the values in the COMDIV0 and COMDIV1 MMRs (16-bit value, DL). Baud Rate = 41.78 MHz 2CD - 16 x 2 x DL Baud Rate = 41 .78 MHz 2 3 x 16 x 8 x 2 x 128 2048 where: Baud Rate = 19,200 bps Error = 0%, compared to 6.25% with the normal baud rate generator. UART Register Definitions The UART interface consists of 12 registers: COMTX, COMRX, COMDIV0, COMIEN0, COMDIV1, COMIID0, COMCON0, COMCON1, COMSTA0, COMSTA1, COMSCR, and COMDIV2. Table 93 gives some common baud rate values. Table 94. COMTX Register Table 93. Baud Rate Using the Normal Baud Rate Generator Baud Rate 9600 19,200 115,200 9600 19,200 115,200 CD 0 0 0 3 3 3 DL 0x88 0x44 0x0B 0x11 0x08 0x01 Actual Baud Rate 9600 19,200 118,691 9600 20,400 163,200 % Error 0 0 3 0 6.25 41.67 Fractional Divider The fractional divider, combined with the normal baud rate generator, produces a wider range of more accurate baud rates. /2 FBEN /16DL UART /(M+N/2048) Address 0xFFFF0700 Default Value 0x00 Access R/W COMTX is an 8-bit transmit register. Table 95. COMRX Register Name COMRX Address 0xFFFF0700 Default Value 0x00 Access R COMRX is an 8-bit receive register. Table 96. COMDIV0 Register Name COMDIV0 Address 0xFFFF0700 Default Value 0x00 Access R/W COMDIV0 is a low byte divisor latch. COMTX, COMRX, and COMDIV0 share the same address location. COMTX and COMRX can be accessed when Bit 7 in the COMCON0 register is cleared. COMDIV0 can be accessed when Bit 7 of COMCON0 is set. 04955-032 CORE CLOCK Name COMTX Figure 75. Baud Rate Generation Options Calculation of the baud rate using fractional divider is as follows: Baud Rate M+ 41.78 MHz N 2 CD 16 DL 2 M 2048 41.78 MHz N = 2048 Baud Rate x 2CD x 16 x DL x 2 For example, generation of 19,200 baud with CD bits = 3 (Table 93 gives DL = 0x08) is M 41.78 MHz N 2048 19200 2 3 16 8 2 M N 1.06 2048 where: M=1 N = 0.06 x 2048 = 128 Table 97. COMIEN0 Register Name COMIEN0 Address 0xFFFF0704 Default Value 0x00 Access R/W COMIEN0 is the interrupt enable register. Table 98. COMIEN0 MMR Bit Descriptions Bit 7:4 3 Name N/A EDSSI 2 ELSI 1 ETBEI 0 ERBFI Rev. G | Page 71 of 101 Description Reserved. Modem status interrupt enable bit. Set by user to enable generation of an interrupt if any of COMSTA1[3:1] is set. Cleared by user. Rx status interrupt enable bit. Set by user to enable generation of an interrupt if any of COMSTA0[4:1] is set. Cleared by user. Enable transmit buffer empty interrupt. Set by user to enable interrupt when buffer is empty during a transmission. Cleared by user. Enable receive buffer full interrupt. Set by user to enable interrupt when buffer is full during a reception. Cleared by user. ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Table 99. COMDIV1 Register Name COMDIV1 Address 0xFFFF0704 Table 104. COMCON1 Register Default Value 0x00 Access R/W COMDIV1 is a divisor latch (high byte) register. Address 0xFFFF0708 Name COMCON1 Access R Bit 7:5 4 Name 3 PEN 2 STOP 1 RTS 0 DTR LOOPBACK Table 101. COMIID0 MMR Bit Descriptions Bit 0 NINT 1 0 Priority N/A 1 (Highest) 10 0 2 01 0 3 00 0 4 (Lowest) Definition No interrupt Receive line status interrupt Receive buffer full interrupt Transmit buffer empty interrupt Modem status interrupt Clearing Operation N/A Read COMSTA0 Read COMRX Write data to COMTX or read COMIID0 Read COMSTA1 Table 102. COMCON0 Register Name COMCON0 Address 0xFFFF070C Default Value 0x00 Default Value 0x00 Access R/W Description Reserved. Loopback. Set by user to enable loopback mode. In loopback mode, SOUT (see Table 78) is forced high. The modem signals are also directly connected to the status inputs (RTS to CTS and DTR to DSR). Cleared by user to be in normal mode. Parity enable bit. Set by user to transmit and check the parity bit. Cleared by user for no parity transmission or checking. Stop bit. Set by user to transmit 1.5 stop bits if the word length is five bits, or 2 stop bits if the word length is six bits, seven bits, or eight bits. The receiver checks the first stop bit only, regardless of the number of stop bits selected. Cleared by user to generate 1 stop bit in the transmitted data. Request to send. Set by user to force the RTS output to 0. Cleared by user to force the RTS output to 1. Data terminal ready. Set by user to force the DTR output to 0. Cleared by user to force the DTR output to 1. Table 106. COMSTA0 Register COMCON0 is the line control register. Name COMSTA0 Table 103. COMCON0 MMR Bit Descriptions COMSTA0 is the line status register. Bit 7 Table 107. COMSTA0 MMR Bit Descriptions Name DLAB 6 BRK 5 SP 4 EPS 3 PEN 2 1:0 STOP WLS Access R/W Table 105. COMCON1 MMR Bit Descriptions Default Value 0x01 COMIID0 is the interrupt identification register. Bit 2:1 Status Bits 00 11 Address 0xFFFF0710 COMCON1 is the modem control register. Table 100. COMIID0 Register Name COMIID0 Data Sheet Description Divisor latch access. Set by user to enable access to the COMDIV0 and COMDIV1 registers. Cleared by user to disable access to COMDIV0 and COMDIV1 and enable access to COMRX and COMTX. Set break. Set by user to force SOUT to 0. Cleared to operate in normal mode. Stick parity. Set by user to force parity to defined values: 1 if EPS = 1 and PEN = 1, 0 if EPS = 0 and PEN = 1. Even parity select bit. Set for even parity. Cleared for odd parity. Parity enable bit. Set by user to transmit and check the parity bit. Cleared by user for no parity transmission or checking. Stop bit. Set by user to transmit 1.5 stop bits if the word length is five bits or 2 stop bits if the word length is six bits, seven bits, or eight bits. The receiver checks the first stop bit only, regardless of the number of stop bits selected. Cleared by user to generate 1 stop bit in the transmitted data. Word length select: 00 = five bits, 01 = six bits, 10 = seven bits, 11 = eight bits. Bit 7 6 Name 5 THRE 4 BI 3 FE 2 PE 1 OE 0 DR Rev. G | Page 72 of 101 TEMT Address 0xFFFF0714 Default Value 0x60 Access R Description Reserved. COMTX and shift register empty status bit. Set automatically if COMTX and shift register are empty. Cleared automatically when writing to COMTX. COMTX empty. Set automatically if COMTX is empty. Cleared automatically when writing to COMTX. Break error. Set when SIN is held low for more than the maximum word length. Cleared automatically. Framing error. Set when an invalid stop bit occurs. Cleared automatically. Parity error. Set when a parity error occurs. Cleared automatically. Overrun error. Set automatically if data is overwritten before being read. Cleared automatically. Data ready. Set automatically when COMRX is full. Cleared by reading COMRX. Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Table 108. COMSTA1 Register Network Addressable UART Register Definitions Name COMSTA1 Address 0xFFFF0718 Default Value 0x00 Access R COMSTA1 is a modem status register. Table 109. COMSTA1 MMR Bit Descriptions Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name DCD RI DSR CTS DDCD 2 TERI 1 DDSR 0 DCTS Description Data carrier detect. Ring indicator. Data set ready. Clear to send. Delta DCD. Set automatically if DCD changed state since last COMSTA1 read. Cleared automatically by reading COMSTA1. Trailing edge RI. Set if RI changed from 0 to 1 since COMSTA1 was last read. Cleared automatically by reading COMSTA1. Delta DSR. Set automatically if DSR changed state since COMSTA1 was last read. Cleared automatically by reading COMSTA1. Delta CTS. Set automatically if CTS changed state since COMSTA1 was last read. Cleared automatically by reading COMSTA1. Table 110. COMSCR Register Name COMSCR Address 0xFFFF071C Four additional registers, COMIEN0, COMIEN1, COMIID1, and COMADR are used in network addressable UART mode only. In network address mode, the least significant bit of the COMIEN1 register is the transmitted network address control bit. If set to 1, the device is transmitting an address. If cleared to 0, the device is transmitting data. For example, the following masterbased code transmits the slave's address followed by the data: COMIEN1 = 0xE7; E9BT, E9BR, ETD, NABP COMTX = 0xA0; COMIEN1 = 0xE6; // to indicate Data is coming Table 113. COMIEN1 Register Name COMIEN1 Access R/W E9BT 5 E9BR Table 112. COMDIV2 MMR Bit Descriptions 4 3 ENI E9BD Bit 15 2 ETD 1 0 NABP NAB Table 111. COMDIV2 Register Default Value 0x0000 Access R/W COMDIV2 is a 16-bit fractional baud divide register. FBM[1:0] 10:0 FBN[10:0] Default Value 0x04 Access R/W COMIEN1 is an 8-bit network enable register. 6 14:13 12:11 Address 0xFFFF0720 Table 114. COMIEN1 MMR Bit Descriptions Default Value 0x00 COMSCR is an 8-bit scratch register used for temporary storage. It is also used in network addressable UART mode. Name FBEN Clear NAB bit COMTX = 0x55; // Tx data to slave: 0x55 Name ENAM Address 0xFFFF072C // Slave address is 0xA0 while(!(0x020==(COMSTA0 & 0x020))){} // wait for adr tx to finish. Bit 7 Name COMDIV2 //Setting ENAM, Description Fractional baud rate generator enable bit. Set by user to enable the fractional baud rate generator. Cleared by user to generate baud rate using the standard 450 UART baud rate generator. Reserved. M if FBM = 0, M = 4 (see the Fractional Divider section). N (see the Fractional Divider section). Network Addressable UART Mode This mode connects the MicroConverter to a 256-node serial network, either as a hardware single master or via software in a multimaster network. Bit 7 (ENAM) of the COMIEN1 register must be set to enable UART in network addressable mode (see Table 114). Note that there is no parity check in this mode. Description Network address mode enable bit. Set by user to enable network address mode. Cleared by user to disable network address mode. 9-bit transmit enable bit. Set by user to enable 9-bit transmit. ENAM must be set. Cleared by user to disable 9-bit transmit. 9-bit receive enable bit. Set by user to enable 9-bit receive. ENAM must be set. Cleared by user to disable 9-bit receive. Network interrupt enable bit. Word length. Set for 9-bit data. E9BT has to be cleared. Cleared for 8-bit data. Transmitter pin driver enable bit. Set by user to enable SOUT pin as an output in slave mode or multimaster mode. Cleared by user; SOUT is three-state. Network address bit. Interrupt polarity bit. Network address bit (if NABP = 1). Set by user to transmit the slave address. Cleared by user to transmit data. Table 115. COMIID1 Register Name COMIID1 Address 0xFFFF0724 Default Value 0x01 Access R COMIID1 is an 8-bit network interrupt register. Bit 7 to Bit 4 are reserved (see Table 116). Rev. G | Page 73 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 MISO (Master In, Slave Out) Pin Table 116. COMIID1 MMR Bit Descriptions Bit 3:1 Status Bits 000 110 Bit 0 NINT 1 0 2 101 0 3 Priority 011 0 1 010 0 2 001 0 3 000 0 4 Definition No interrupt Matching network address Address transmitted, buffer empty Receive line status interrupt Receive buffer full interrupt Transmit buffer empty interrupt Modem status interrupt Clearing Operation Read COMRX Write data to COMTX or read COMIID0 Read COMSTA0 Read COMRX Write data to COMTX or read COMIID0 Read COMSTA1 Note that to receive a network address interrupt, the slave must ensure that Bit 0 of COMIEN0 (enable receive buffer full interrupt) is set to 1. Table 117. COMADR Register Name COMADR Address 0xFFFF0728 Default Value 0xAA Data Sheet The MISO pin is configured as an input line in master mode and an output line in slave mode. The MISO line on the master (data in) should be connected to the MISO line in the slave device (data out). The data is transferred as byte wide (8-bit) serial data, MSB first. MOSI (Master Out, Slave In) Pin The MOSI pin is configured as an output line in master mode and an input line in slave mode. The MOSI line on the master (data out) should be connected to the MOSI line in the slave device (data in). The data is transferred as byte wide (8-bit) serial data, MSB first. SCLK (Serial Clock I/O) Pin The master serial clock (SCLK) is used to synchronize the data being transmitted and received through the MOSI SCLK period. Therefore, a byte is transmitted/received after eight SCLK periods. The SCLK pin is configured as an output in master mode and as an input in slave mode. In master mode, the polarity and phase of the clock are controlled by the SPICON register, and the bit rate is defined in the SPIDIV register as follows: Access R/W f SERIAL CLOCK f UCLK 2 (1 SPIDIV) COMADR is an 8-bit, read/write network address register that holds the address checked for by the network addressable UART. Upon receiving this address, the device interrupts the processor and/or sets the appropriate status bit in COMIID1. The maximum speed of the SPI clock is dependent on the clock divider bits and is summarized in Table 118. SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE CD Bits SPIDIV in Hex SPI dpeed in MHz The ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 integrate a complete hardware serial peripheral interface (SPI) on-chip. SPI is an industry standard, synchronous serial interface that allows eight bits of data to be synchronously transmitted and simultaneously received, that is, full duplex up to a maximum bit rate of 3.48 Mb, as shown in Table 118. The SPI interface is not operational with core clock divider (CD) bits. POWCON[2:0] = 6 or 7 in master mode. The SPI port can be configured for master or slave operation. and typically consists of four pins: MISO (P1.5), MOSI (P1.6), SCLK (P1.4), and CS (P1.7). On the transmit side, the SPITX register (and a TX shift register outside it) loads data onto the transmit pin (in slave mode, MISO; in master mode, MOSI). The transmit status bit, Bit 0, in SPISTA indicates whether there is valid data in the SPITX register. Similarly, the receive data path consists of the SPIRX register (and an RX shift register). SPISTA, Bit 3 indicates whether there is valid data in the SPIRX register. If valid data in the SPIRX register is overwritten or if valid data in the RX shift register is discarded, SPISTA, Bit 5 (the overflow bit) is set. Table 118. SPI Speed vs. Clock Divider Bits in Master Mode 0 0x05 3.482 1 0x0B 1.741 2 0x17 0.870 3 0x2F 0.435 4 0x5F 0.218 5 0xBF 0.109 In slave mode, the SPICON register must be configured with the phase and polarity of the expected input clock. The slave accepts data from an external master up to 10.4 Mb at CD = 0. The formula to determine the maximum speed is as follows: f SERIAL CLOCK f HCLK 4 In both master and slave modes, data is transmitted on one edge of the SCL signal and sampled on the other. Therefore, it is important that the polarity and phase be configured the same for the master and slave devices. Chip Select (CS Input) Pin In SPI slave mode, a transfer is initiated by the assertion of CS, which is an active low input signal. The SPI port then transmits and receives 8-bit data until the transfer is concluded by deassertion of CS. In slave mode, CS is always an input. Rev. G | Page 74 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 SPI Registers Table 121. SPIRX Register The following MMR registers are used to control the SPI interface: SPISTA, SPIRX, SPITX, SPIDIV, and SPICON. Name SPIRX Address 0xFFFF0A00 Default Value 0x00 Access R SPIRX is an 8-bit, read-only receive register. Table 119. SPISTA Register Name SPISTA Address 0xFFFF0A04 Default Value 0x00 Access R SPISTA is an 8-bit read-only status register. Only Bit 1 or Bit 4 of this register generates an interrupt. Bit 6 of the SPICON register determines which bit generates the interrupt. Table 122. SPITX Register Name SPITX Address 0xFFFF0A08 Default Value 0x00 Access W SPITX is an 8-bit, write-only transmit register. Table 123. SPIDIV Register Table 120. SPISTA MMR Bit Descriptions Bit 7:6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Description Reserved. SPIRX data register overflow status bit. Set if SPIRX is overflowing. Cleared by reading the SPIRX register. SPIRX data register IRQ. Set automatically if Bit 3 or Bit 5 is set. Cleared by reading the SPIRX register. SPIRX data register full status bit. Set automatically if a valid data is present in the SPIRX register. Cleared by reading the SPIRX register. SPITX data register underflow status bit. Set automatically if SPITX is underflowing. Cleared by writing in the SPITX register. SPITX data register IRQ. Set automatically if Bit 0 is clear or Bit 2 is set. Cleared by writing in the SPITX register or if finished transmission disabling the SPI. SPITX data register empty status bit. Set by writing to SPITX to send data. This bit is set during transmission of data. Cleared when SPITX is empty. Name SPIDIV Address 0xFFFF0A0C Default Value 0x1B Access R/W SPIDIV is an 8-bit, serial clock divider register. Table 124. SPICON Register Name SPICON Address 0xFFFF0A10 Default Value 0x0000 Access R/W SPICON is a 16-bit control register. Table 125. SPICON MMR Bit Descriptions Bit 15:13 12 Description Reserved Continuous transfer enable 11 10 Loop back enable Slave MISO output enable 9 Clip select output enable 8 SPIRX overflow overwrite enable 7 6 SPITX underflow mode Transfer and interrupt mode 5 4 3 2 LSB first transfer enable bit Reserved Serial clock polarity mode bit Serial clock phase mode bit 1 0 Master mode enable bit SPI enable bit Function N/A Set by user to enable continuous transfer. In master mode, the transfer continues until no valid data is available in the TX register. CS is asserted and remains asserted for the duration of each 8-bit serial transfer until TX is empty. Cleared by user to disable continuous transfer. Each transfer consists of a single 8-bit serial transfer. If valid data exists in the SPITX register, then a new transfer is initiated after a stall period. Set by user to connect MISO to MOSI and test software. Cleared by user to be in normal mode. Set this bit to disable the output driver on the MISO pin. The MISO pin becomes open drain when this bit is set. Clear this bit for MISO to operate as normal. Set by user in master mode to disable the chip select output. cleared by user to enable the chip select output. P1.7 should be configured as CS before SPICON is configured as a master when the chip select output enabled is also selected. Set by user, the valid data in the RX register is overwritten by the new serial byte received. Cleared by user, the new serial byte received is discarded. Set by user to transmit 0. Cleared by user to transmit the previous data. Set by user to initiate transfer with a write to the SPITX register. Interrupt occurs only when TX is empty. Cleared by user to initiate transfer with a read of the SPIRX register. Interrupt occurs only when RX is full. Set by user, the LSB is transmitted first. Cleared by user, the MSB is transmitted first. Set by user, the serial clock idles high. Cleared by user, the serial clock idles low. Set by user, the serial clock pulses at the beginning of each serial bit transfer. Cleared by user, the serial clock pulses at the end of each serial bit transfer. Set by user to enable master mode. Cleared by user to enable slave mode. Set by user to enable the SPI. Cleared by user to disable the SPI. Rev. G | Page 75 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet I2C-COMPATIBLE INTERFACES Slave Addresses The ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 support two licensed I2C interfaces. The I2C interfaces are both implemented as a hard-ware master and a full slave interface. Because the two I2C inter-faces are identical, this data sheet describes only I2C0 in detail. Note that the two masters and one of the slaves have individual interrupts (see the Interrupt System section). The registers I2C0ID0, I2C0ID1, I2C0ID2, and I2C0ID3 contain the device IDs. The device compares the four I2C0IDx registers to the address byte. To be correctly addressed, the seven MSBs of either ID register must be identical to that of the seven MSBs of the first received address byte. The LSB of the ID registers (the transfer direction bit) is ignored in the process of address recognition. Note that when configured as an I2C master device, the ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 cannot generate a repeated start condition. I2C Registers The two GPIO pins used for data transfer, SDAx and SCLx, are configured in a wired-AND format that allows arbitration in a multimaster system. These pins require external pull-up resistors. Typical pull-up values are 10 k. The I2C bus peripheral address in the I2C bus system is programmed by the user. This ID can be modified any time a transfer is not in progress. The user can configure the interface to respond to four slave addresses. The transfer sequence of an I2C system consists of a master device initiating a transfer by generating a start condition while the bus is idle. The master transmits the slave device address and the direction of the data transfer during the initial address transfer. If the master does not lose arbitration and the slave acknowledges, the data transfer is initiated. This continues until the master issues a stop condition and the bus becomes idle. The I2C peripheral can be configured only as a master or slave at any given time. The same I2C channel cannot simultaneously support master and slave modes. Serial Clock Generation The I2C master in the system generates the serial clock for a transfer. The master channel can be configured to operate in fast mode (400 kHz) or standard mode (100 kHz). The I2C peripheral interface consists of 18 MMRs, which are discussed in this section. Table 126. I2CxMSTA Registers Name I2C0MSTA I2C1MSTA fUCLK (2 DIVH) (2 DIVL) where: fUCLK = clock before the clock divider. DIVH = the high period of the clock. DIVL = the low period of the clock. Bit 7 Access Type R/W 6 R 5 R 4 R 3 R 2 R 1 R 0 R DIVH = DIVL = 0xCF DIVH = 0x28, DIVL = 0x3C The I2CxDIV registers correspond to DIVH:DIVL. Access R/W R/W Table 127. I2C0MSTA MMR Bit Descriptions Thus, for 100 kHz operation, and for 400 kHz, Default Value 0x00 0x00 I2CxMSTA are status registers for the master channel. The bit rate is defined in the I2C0DIV MMR as follows: f SERIAL CLOCK Address 0xFFFF0800 0xFFFF0900 Description Master transmit FIFO flush. Set by user to flush the master Tx FIFO. Cleared automatically after the master Tx FIFO is flushed. This bit also flushes the slave receive FIFO. Master busy. Set automatically if the master is busy. Cleared automatically. Arbitration loss. Set in multimaster mode if another master has the bus. Cleared when the bus becomes available. No ACK. Set automatically if there is no acknowledge of the address by the slave device. Cleared automatically by reading the I2C0MSTA register. Master receive IRQ. Set after receiving data. Cleared automatically by reading the I2C0MRX register. Master transmit IRQ. Set at the end of a transmission. Cleared automatically by writing to the I2C0MTX register. Master transmit FIFO underflow. Set automatically if the master transmit FIFO is underflowing. Cleared automatically by writing to the I2C0MTX register. Master TX FIFO not full. Set automatically if the slave transmit FIFO is not full. Cleared automatically by writing twice to the I2C0STX register. Table 128. I2CxSSTA Registers Name I2C0SSTA I2C1SSTA Address 0xFFFF0804 0xFFFF0904 Default Value 0x01 0x01 I2CxSSTA are status registers for the slave channel. Rev. G | Page 76 of 101 Access R R Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Table 129. I2C0SSTA MMR Bit Descriptions Table 130. I2CxSRX Registers Bit 31:15 14 Name I2C0SRX I2C1SRX Value 13 12:11 00 01 10 11 10 9:8 00 01 10 11 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Description Reserved. These bits should be written as 0. Start decode bit. Set by hardware if the device receives a valid start plus matching address. Cleared by an I2C stop condition or an I2C general call reset. Repeated start decode bit. Set by hardware if the device receives a valid repeated start and matching address. Cleared by an I2C stop condition, a read of the I2CSSTA register, or an I2C general call reset. ID decode bits. Received Address Matched ID Register 0. Received Address Matched ID Register 1. Received Address Matched ID Register 2. Received Address Matched ID Register 3. Stop after start and matching address interrupt. Set by hardware if the slave device receives an I2C stop condition after a previous I2C start condition and matching address. Cleared by a read of the I2C0SSTA register. General call ID. No general call. General call reset and program address. General call program address. General call matching alternative ID. General call interrupt. Set if the slave device receives a general call of any type. Cleared by setting Bit 8 of the I2CxCFG register. If it is a general call reset, all registers are at their default values. If it is a hardware general call, the Rx FIFO holds the second byte of the general call. This is similar to the I2C0ALT register (unless it is a general call to reprogram the device address). For more details, see the I2C bus specification, Version 2.1, January 2000. Slave busy. Set automatically if the slave is busy. Cleared automatically. No ACK. Set if master asking for data and no data is available. Cleared automatically by reading the I2C0SSTA register. Slave receive FIFO overflow. Set automatically if the slave receive FIFO is overflowing. Cleared automatically by reading the I2C0SSTA register. Slave receive IRQ. Set after receiving data. Cleared automatically by reading the I2C0SRX register or flushing the FIFO. Slave transmit IRQ. Set at the end of a transmission. Cleared automatically by writing to the I2C0STX register. Slave transmit FIFO underflow. Set automatically if the slave transmit FIFO is underflowing. Cleared automatically by writing to the I2C0SSTA register. Slave transmit FIFO not full. Set automatically if the slave transmit FIFO is not full. Cleared automatically by writing twice to the I2C0STX register. Address 0xFFFF0808 0xFFFF0908 Default Value 0x00 0x00 Access R R I2CxSRX are receive registers for the slave channel. Table 131. I2CxSTX Registers Name I2C0STX I2C1STX Address 0xFFFF080C 0xFFFF090C Default Value 0x00 0x00 Access W W I2CxSTX are transmit registers for the slave channel. Table 132. I2CxMRX Registers Name I2C0MRX I2C1MRX Address 0xFFFF0810 0xFFFF0910 Default Value 0x00 0x00 Access R R I2CxMRX are receive registers for the master channel. Table 133. I2CxMTX Registers Name I2C0MTX I2C1MTX Address 0xFFFF0814 0xFFFF0914 Default Value 0x00 0x00 Access W W I2CxMTX are transmit registers for the master channel. Table 134. I2CxCNT Registers Name I2C0CNT I2C1CNT Address 0xFFFF0818 0xFFFF0918 Default Value 0x00 0x00 Access R/W R/W I2CxCNT are 3-bit, master receive, data count registers. If a master read transfer sequence is initiated, the I2CxCNT registers denote the number of bytes (-1) to be read from the slave device. By default, this counter is 0, which corresponds to the one byte expected. Table 135. I2CxADR Registers Name I2C0ADR I2C1ADR Address 0xFFFF081C 0xFFFF091C Default Value 0x00 0x00 Access R/W R/W I2CxADR are master address byte registers. The I2CxADR value is the device address that the master wants to communicate with. It automatically transmits at the start of a master transfer sequence if there is no valid data in the I2CxMTX register when the master enable bit is set. Table 136. I2CxBYTE Registers Name I2C0BYTE I2C1BYTE Address 0xFFFF0824 0xFFFF0924 Default Value 0x00 0x00 Access R/W R/W I2CxBYTE are broadcast byte registers. Data written to these registers does not go through the TxFIFO. This data is transmitted at the start of a transfer sequence before the address. After the byte is transmitted and acknowledged, the I2C expects another byte written in I2CxBYTE or an address written to the address register. Rev. G | Page 77 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Table 138. I2CxCFG Registers Table 137. I2CxALT Registers Name I2C0ALT I2C1ALT Address 0xFFFF0828 0xFFFF0928 Data Sheet Default Value 0x00 0x00 Access R/W R/W I2CxALT are hardware general call ID registers used in slave mode. Name I2C0CFG I2C1CFG Address 0xFFFF082C 0xFFFF092C Default Value 0x00 0x00 Access R/W R/W I2CxCFG are configuration registers. Table 139. I2C0CFG MMR Bit Descriptions Bit 31:5 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Description Reserved. These bits should be written by the user as 0. Enable stop interrupt. Set by the user to generate an interrupt upon receiving a stop condition and after receiving a valid start condition and matching address. Cleared by the user to disable the generation of an interrupt upon receiving a stop condition. Reserved. Reserved. Enable stretch SCL (holds SCL low). Set by the user to stretch the SCL line. Cleared by the user to disable stretching of the SCL line. Reserved. Slave Tx FIFO request interrupt enable. Set by the user to disable the slave Tx FIFO request interrupt. Cleared by the user to generate an interrupt request just after the negative edge of the clock for the R/W bit. This allows the user to input data into the slave Tx FIFO if it is empty. At 400 ksps and the core clock running at 41.78 MHz, the user has 45 clock cycles to take appropriate action, taking interrupt latency into account. General call status bit clear. Set by the user to clear the general call status bits. Cleared automatically by hardware after the general call status bits are cleared. Master serial clock enable bit. Set by user to enable generation of the serial clock in master mode. Cleared by user to disable serial clock in master mode. Loopback enable bit. Set by user to internally connect the transition to the reception to test user software. Cleared by user to operate in normal mode. Start backoff disable bit. Set by user in multimaster mode. If losing arbitration, the master immediately tries to retransmit. Cleared by user to enable start backoff. After losing arbitration, the master waits before trying to retransmit. Hardware general call enable. When this bit and Bit 3 are set and have received a general call (Address 0x00) and a data byte, the device checks the contents of I2C0ALT against the receive register. If the contents match, the device has received a hardware general call. This is used if a device needs urgent attention from a master device without knowing which master it needs to turn to. This is a "to whom it may concern" call. The ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 watch for these addresses. The device that requires attention embeds its own address into the message. All masters listen, and the one that can handle the device contacts its slave and acts appropriately. The LSB of the I2C0ALT register should always be written to 1, as indicated in The I2C-Bus Specification, January 2000, from NXP. General call enable bit. This bit is set by the user to enable the slave device to acknowledge (ACK) an I2C general call, Address 0x00 (write). The device then recognizes a data bit. If it receives a 0x06 (reset and write programmable part of slave address by hardware) as the data byte, the I2C interface resets as as indicated in The I2C-Bus Specification, January 2000, from NXP. This command can be used to reset an entire I2C system. The general call interrupt status bit sets on any general call. The user must take corrective action by setting up the I2C interface after a reset. If it receives a 0x04 (write programmable part of slave address by hardware) as the data byte, the general call interrupt status bit sets on any general call. The user must take corrective action by reprogramming the device address. Reserved. Master enable bit. Set by user to enable the master I2C channel. Cleared by user to disable the master I2C channel. Slave enable bit. Set by user to enable the slave I2C channel. A slave transfer sequence is monitored for the device address in I2C0ID0, I2C0ID1, I2C0ID2, and I2C0ID3. At 400 kSPs, the core clock should run at 41.78 MHz because the interrupt latency could be up to 45 clock cycles alone. After the I2C read bit, the user has 0.5 of an I2C clock cycle to load the Tx FIFO. AT 400 kSPS, this is 1.26 s, the interrupt latency. Rev. G | Page 78 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Table 140. I2CxDIV Registers Table 144. I2C0FSTA MMR Bit Descriptions Name I2C0DIV I2C1DIV Address 0xFFFF0830 0xFFFF0930 Default Value 0x1F1F 0x1F1F Access R/W R/W I2CxDIV are the clock divider registers. Access Type Bit 15:10 9 R/W 8 R/W 7:6 R Value Table 141. I2CxIDx Registers Name I2C0ID0 I2C0ID1 I2C0ID2 I2C0ID3 I2C1ID0 I2C1ID1 I2C1ID2 I2C1ID3 Address 0xFFFF0838 0xFFFF083C 0xFFFF0840 0xFFFF0844 0xFFFF0938 0xFFFF093C 0xFFFF0940 0xFFFF0944 Default Value 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 Access R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W I2CxID0, I2CxID1, I2CxID2, and I2CxID3 are slave address device ID registers of I2Cx. 00 01 10 11 5:4 R 00 01 10 11 Table 142. I2CxCCNT Registers Name I2C0CCNT I2C1CCNT Address 0xFFFF0848 0xFFFF0948 Default Value 0x01 0x01 Access R/W R/W 3:2 R 00 01 10 11 I2CxCCNT are 8-bit start/stop generation counters. They hold off SDA low for start and stop conditions. Table 143. I2CxFSTA Registers Name I2C0FSTA I2C1FSTA Address 0xFFFF084C 0xFFFF094C 1:0 Default Value 0x0000 0x0000 Access R/W R/W I2CxFSTA are FIFO status registers. Rev. G | Page 79 of 101 R 00 01 10 11 Description Reserved. Master transmit FIFO flush. Set by the user to flush the master Tx FIFO. Cleared automatically when the master Tx FIFO is flushed. This bit also flushes the slave receive FIFO. Slave transmit FIFO flush. Set by the user to flush the slave Tx FIFO. Cleared automatically after the slave Tx FIFO is flushed. Master Rx FIFO status bits. FIFO empty. Byte written to FIFO. One byte in FIFO. FIFO full. Master Tx FIFO status bits. FIFO empty. Byte written to FIFO. One byte in FIFO. FIFO full. Slave Rx FIFO status bits. FIFO empty. Byte written to FIFO. One byte in FIFO. FIFO full. Slave Tx FIFO status bits. FIFO empty. Byte written to FIFO. One byte in FIFO. FIFO full. ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC ARRAY (PLA) Table 146. PLAELMx Registers Every ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 integrates a fully programmable logic array (PLA) that consists of two independent but interconnected PLA blocks. Each block consists of eight PLA elements, giving each part a total of 16 PLA elements. Name PLAELM0 PLAELM1 PLAELM2 PLAELM3 PLAELM4 PLAELM5 PLAELM6 PLAELM7 PLAELM8 PLAELM9 PLAELM10 PLAELM11 PLAELM12 PLAELM13 PLAELM14 PLAELM15 Each PLA element contains a two-input lookup table that can be configured to generate any logic output function based on two inputs and a flip-flop. This is represented in Figure 76. 0 4 A 2 LOOKUP TABLE B 3 04955-033 1 Figure 76. PLA Element Address 0xFFFF0B00 0xFFFF0B04 0xFFFF0B08 0xFFFF0B0C 0xFFFF0B10 0xFFFF0B14 0xFFFF0B18 0xFFFF0B1C 0xFFFF0B20 0xFFFF0B24 0xFFFF0B28 0xFFFF0B2C 0xFFFF0B30 0xFFFF0B34 0xFFFF0B38 0xFFFF0B3C Default Value 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 0x0000 Access R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W In total, 30 GPIO pins are available on each ADuC7019/20/21/ 22/24/25/26/27/28/29 for the PLA. These include 16 input pins and 14 output pins, which msut be configured in the GPxCON register as PLA pins before using the PLA. Note that the comparator output is also included as one of the 16 input pins. PLAELMx are Element 0 to Element 15 control registers. They configure the input and output mux of each element, select the function in the lookup table, and bypass/use the flip-flop. See Table 147 and Table 152. The PLA is configured via a set of user MMRs. The output(s) of the PLA can be routed to the internal interrupt system, to the CONVSTART signal of the ADC, to an MMR, or to any of the 16 PLA output pins. Bit 31:11 10:9 8:7 6 The two blocks can be interconnected as follows: Output of Element 15 (Block 1) can be fed back to Input 0 of Mux 0 of Element 0 (Block 0). Output of Element 7 (Block 0) can be fed back to the Input 0 of Mux 0 of Element 8 (Block 1). Table 147. PLAELMx MMR Bit Descriptions Value 5 4:1 Table 145. Element Input/Output PLA Block 0 Element Input 0 P1.0 1 P1.1 2 P1.2 3 P1.3 4 P1.4 5 P1.5 6 P1.6 7 P0.0 Output P1.7 P0.4 P0.5 P0.6 P0.7 P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 PLA Block 1 Element Input 8 P3.0 9 P3.1 10 P3.2 11 P3.3 12 P3.4 13 P3.5 14 P3.6 15 P3.7 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Output P4.0 P4.1 P4.2 P4.3 P4.4 P4.5 P4.6 P4.7 PLA MMRs Interface The PLA peripheral interface consists of the 22 MMRs described in this section. 0 Rev. G | Page 80 of 101 Description Reserved. Mux 0 control (see Table 152). Mux 1 control (see Table 152). Mux 2 control. Set by user to select the output of Mux 0. Cleared by user to select the bit value from PLADIN. Mux 3 control. Set by user to select the input pin of the particular element. Cleared by user to select the output of Mux 1. Lookup table control. 0. NOR. B AND NOT A. NOT A. A AND NOT B. NOT B. EXOR. NAND. AND. EXNOR. B. NOT A OR B. A. A OR NOT B. OR. 1. Mux 4 control. Set by user to bypass the flipflop. Cleared by user to select the flip-flop (cleared by default). Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Table 148. PLACLK Register Name PLACLK Address 0xFFFF0B40 Default Value 0x00 Access R/W PLACLK is the clock selection for the flip-flops of Block 0 and Block 1. Note that the maximum frequency when using the GPIO pins as the clock input for the PLA blocks is 44 MHz. Table 150. PLAIRQ Register Name PLAIRQ Address 0xFFFF0B44 Default Value 0x00000000 PLAIRQ enables IRQ0 and/or IRQ1 and selects the source of the IRQ. Table 149. PLACLK MMR Bit Descriptions Table 151. PLAIRQ MMR Bit Descriptions Bit 7 6:4 Bit 15:13 12 Value 000 001 010 011 100 101 Other 3 2:0 000 001 010 011 100 101 Other Description Reserved. Block 1 clock source selection. GPIO clock on P0.5. GPIO clock on P0.0. GPIO clock on P0.7. HCLK. OCLK (32.768 kHz) external crystal only. Timer1 overflow. Reserved. Reserved. Block 0 clock source selection. GPIO clock on P0.5. GPIO clock on P0.0. GPIO clock on P0.7. HCLK. OCLK (32.768 kHz) external crystal only. Timer1 overflow. Reserved. Value 11:8 0000 0001 1111 7:5 4 3:0 0000 0001 1111 Description Reserved. PLA IRQ1 enable bit. Set by user to enable IRQ1 output from PLA. Cleared by user to disable IRQ1 output from PLA. PLA IRQ1 source. PLA Element 0. PLA Element 1. PLA Element 15. Reserved. PLA IRQ0 enable bit. Set by user to enable IRQ0 output from PLA. Cleared by user to disable IRQ0 output from PLA. PLA IRQ0 source. PLA Element 0. PLA Element 1. PLA Element 15. Table 152. Feedback Configuration Bit 10:9 8:7 Value 00 01 10 11 00 01 10 11 PLAELM0 Element 15 Element 2 Element 4 Element 6 Element 1 Element 3 Element 5 Element 7 Access R/W PLAELM1 to PLAELM7 Element 0 Element 2 Element 4 Element 6 Element 1 Element 3 Element 5 Element 7 Rev. G | Page 81 of 101 PLAELM8 Element 7 Element 10 Element 12 Element 14 Element 9 Element 11 Element 13 Element 15 PLAELM9 to PLAELM15 Element 8 Element 10 Element 12 Element 14 Element 9 Element 11 Element 13 Element 15 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Table 156. PLADIN MMR Bit Descriptions Table 153. PLAADC Register Name PLAADC Address 0xFFFF0B48 Data Sheet Default Value 0x00000000 Access R/W PLAADC is the PLA source for the ADC start conversion signal. Bit 31:16 15:0 Description Reserved. Input bit to Element 15 to Element 0. Table 154. PLAADC MMR Bit Descriptions Table 157. PLADOUT Register Bit 31:5 4 Name PLADOUT Value 3:0 0000 0001 1111 Description Reserved. ADC start conversion enable bit. Set by user to enable ADC start conversion from PLA. Cleared by user to disable ADC start conversion from PLA. ADC start conversion source. PLA Element 0. PLA Element 1. PLA Element 15. Address 0xFFFF0B50 Default Value 0x00000000 Access R PLADOUT is a data output MMR for PLA. This register is always updated. Table 158. PLADOUT MMR Bit Descriptions Bit 31:16 15:0 Description Reserved. Output bit from Element 15 to Element 0. Table 159. PLALCK Register Table 155. PLADIN Register Name PLADIN Address 0xFFFF0B4C Default Value 0x00000000 PLADIN is a data input MMR for PLA. Access R/W Name PLALCK Address 0xFFFF0B54 Default Value 0x00 Access W PLALCK is a PLA lock option. Bit 0 is written only once. When set, it does not allow modifying any of the PLA MMRs, except PLADIN. A PLA tool is provided in the development system to easily configure the PLA. Rev. G | Page 82 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 PROCESSOR REFERENCE PERIPHERALS INTERRUPT SYSTEM IRQ There are 23 interrupt sources on the ADuC7019/20/21/22/ 24/25/26/27/28/29 that are controlled by the interrupt controller. Most interrupts are generated from the on-chip peripherals, such as ADC and UART. Four additional interrupt sources are generated from external interrupt request pins, IRQ0, IRQ1, IRQ2, and IRQ3. The ARM7TDMI CPU core only recognizes interrupts as one of two types: a normal interrupt request IRQ or a fast interrupt request FIQ. All the interrupts can be masked separately. The interrupt request (IRQ) is the exception signal to enter the IRQ mode of the processor. It is used to service general-purpose interrupt handling of internal and external events. The control and configuration of the interrupt system are managed through nine interrupt-related registers, four dedicated to IRQ, and four dedicated to FIQ. An additional MMR is used to select the programmed interrupt source. The bits in each IRQ and FIQ register (except for Bit 23) represent the same interrupt source as described in Table 160. IRQSTA (read-only register) provides the current-enabled IRQ source status. When set to 1, that source should generate an active IRQ request to the ARM7TDMI core. There is no priority encoder or interrupt vector generation. This function is implemented in software in a common interrupt handler routine. All 32 bits are logically OR'ed to create the IRQ signal to the ARM7TDMI core. The four 32-bit registers dedicated to IRQ are IRQSTA, IRQSIG, IRQEN, and IRQCLR. Table 161. IRQSTA Register Name IRQSTA Address 0xFFFF0000 Default Value 0x00000000 Access R Table 160. IRQ/FIQ MMRs Bit Description Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Description All interrupts OR'ed (FIQ only) SWI Timer0 Timer1 Wake-up timer (Timer2) Watchdog timer (Timer3) Flash control ADC channel PLL lock I2C0 slave I2C0 master I2C1 master SPI slave SPI master UART External IRQ0 Comparator PSM External IRQ1 PLA IRQ0 PLA IRQ1 External IRQ2 External IRQ3 PWM trip (IRQ only)/PWM sync (FIQ only) Table 162. IRQSIG Register Name IRQSIG 1 Address 0xFFFF0004 Default Value 0x00XXX0001 Access R X indicates an undefined value. IRQSIG reflects the status of the different IRQ sources. If a peripheral generates an IRQ signal, the corresponding bit in the IRQSIG is set; otherwise, it is cleared. The IRQSIG bits are cleared when the interrupt in the particular peripheral is cleared. All IRQ sources can be masked in the IRQEN MMR. IRQSIG is read only. Table 163. IRQEN Register Name IRQEN Address 0xFFFF0008 Default Value 0x00000000 Access R/W IRQEN provides the value of the current enable mask. When each bit is set to 1, the source request is enabled to create an IRQ exception. When each bit is set to 0, the source request is disabled or masked, which does not create an IRQ exception. Note that to clear an already enabled interrupt source, the user must set the appropriate bit in the IRQCLR register. Clearing an interrupt's IRQEN bit does not disable the interrupt. Table 164. IRQCLR Register Name IRQCLR Address 0xFFFF000C Default Value 0x00000000 Access W IRQCLR (write-only register) clears the IRQEN register in order to mask an interrupt source. Each bit set to 1 clears the corresponding bit in the IRQEN register without affecting the remaining bits. The pair of registers, IRQEN and IRQCLR, independently manipulates the enable mask without requiring an atomic read-modify-write. Rev. G | Page 83 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 FIQ The fast interrupt request (FIQ) is the exception signal to enter the FIQ mode of the processor. It is provided to service data transfer or communication channel tasks with low latency. The FIQ interface is identical to the IRQ interface providing the second-level interrupt (highest priority). Four 32-bit registers are dedicated to FIQ: FIQSIG, FIQEN, FIQCLR, and FIQSTA. Data Sheet Table 170. SWICFG MMR Bit Descriptions Bit 31:3 2 Description Reserved. Programmed interrupt (FIQ). Setting/clearing this bit corresponds with setting/clearing Bit 1 of FIQSTA and FIQSIG. Programmed interrupt (IRQ). Setting/clearing this bit corresponds with setting/clearing Bit 1 of IRQSTA and IRQSIG. Reserved. 1 Table 165. FIQSTA Register Name FIQSTA Address 0xFFFF0100 Default Value 0x00000000 Access R Default Value 0x00XXX0001 Access R Table 166. FIQSIG Register Name FIQSIG 1 Address 0xFFFF0104 Table 167. FIQEN Register Address 0xFFFF0108 Default Value 0x00000000 Access R/W Default Value 0x00000000 Access W Table 168. FIQCLR Register Name FIQCLR Address 0xFFFF010C Note that any interrupt signal must be active for at least the equivalent of the interrupt latency time, which is detected by the interrupt controller and by the user in the IRQSTA/FIQSTA register. TIMERS X indicates an undefined value. Name FIQEN 0 Bit 31 to Bit 1 of FIQSTA are logically OR'd to create the FIQ signal to the core and to Bit 0 of both the FIQ and IRQ registers (FIQ source). The logic for FIQEN and IRQEN does not allow an interrupt source to be enabled in both IRQ and FIQ masks. A bit set to 1 in FIQEN does, as a side effect, clear the same bit in IRQEN. Also, a bit set to 1 in IRQEN does, as a side effect, clear the same bit in FIQEN. An interrupt source can be disabled in both the IRQEN and FIQEN masks. Note that to clear an already enabled FIQ source, the user must set the appropriate bit in the FIQCLR register. Clearing an interrupt's FIQEN bit does not disable the interrupt. The ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 have four generalpurpose timer/counters. These four timers in their normal mode of operation can be either free running or periodic. In free-running mode, the counter decreases from the maximum value until zero scale and starts again at the minimum value. (It also increases from the minimum value until full scale and starts again at the maximum value.) In periodic mode, the counter decrements/increments from the value in the load register (TxLD MMR) until zero/full scale and starts again at the value stored in the load register. The timer interval is calculated as follows: If the timer is set to count down then Interval Programmed Interrupts Because the programmed interrupts are nonmaskable, they are controlled by another register, SWICFG, which simultaneously writes into the IRQSTA and IRQSIG registers and/or the FIQSTA and FIQSIG registers. The 32-bit SWICFG register is dedicated to software interrupts(see Table 170). This MMR allows the control of a programmed source interrupt. Table 169. SWICFG Register Name SWICFG Address 0xFFFF0010 Timer0 Timer1 Timer2 or wake-up timer Timer3 or watchdog timer Default Value 0x00000000 Access W TxLD Prescaler Source Clock If the timer is set to count up, then Interval Fs TxLD Prescaler Source Clock The value of a counter can be read at any time by accessing its value register (TxVAL). Note that when a timer is being clocked from a clock other than core clock, an incorrect value may be read (due to an asynchronous clock system). In this configuration, TxVAL should always be read twice. If the two readings are different, it should be read a third time to get the correct value. Timers are started by writing in the control register of the corresponding timer (TxCON). Rev. G | Page 84 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 In normal mode, an IRQ is generated each time the value of the counter reaches zero when counting down. It is also generated each time the counter value reaches full scale when counting up. An IRQ can be cleared by writing any value to clear the register of that particular timer (TxCLRI). The Timer0 interface consists of four MMRs: T0LD, T0VAL, T0CON, and T0CLRI. When using an asynchronous clock-to-clock timer, the interrupt in the timer block may take more time to clear than the time it takes for the code in the interrupt routine to execute. Ensure that the interrupt signal is cleared before leaving the interrupt service routine. This can be done by checking the IRQSTA MMR. Hour:Minute:Second:1/128 Format To use the timer in hour:minute:second:hundredths format, select the 32,768 kHz clock and prescaler of 256. The hundredths field does not represent milliseconds but 1/128 of a second (256/32,768). The bits representing the hour, minute, and second are not consecutive in the register. This arrangement applies to TxLD and TxVAL when using the hour:minute:second:hundredths format as set in TxCON[5:4]. See Table 171 for additional details. Table 172. T0LD Register Name T0LD Address 0xFFFF0300 Value 0 to 23 or 0 to 255 0 0 to 59 0 0 to 59 0 0 to 127 Description Hours Reserved Minutes Reserved Seconds Reserved 1/128 second Name T0VAL Address 0xFFFF0304 Table 174. T0CON Register Name T0CON Address 0xFFFF0308 Bit 15:8 7 1:0 Value 16-BIT DOWN COUNTER Name T0CLRI Address 0xFFFF030C Default Value 0xFF Access W T0CLRI is an 8-bit register. Writing any value to this register clears the interrupt. TIMER0 IRQ ADC CONVERSION TIMER0 VALUE Description Reserved. Timer0 enable bit. Set by user to enable Timer0. Cleared by user to disable Timer0 by default. Timer0 mode. Set by user to operate in periodic mode. Cleared by user to operate in free-running mode. Default mode. Reserved. Prescale. Core Clock/1. Default value. Core Clock/16. Core Clock/256. Undefined. Equivalent to 00. Reserved. Table 176. T0CLRI Register 04955-034 PRESCALER /1, 16 OR 256 Access R/W Table 175. T0CON MMR Bit Descriptions 16-BIT LOAD HCLK Default Value 0x0000 T0CON is the configuration MMR described in Table 175. 00 01 10 11 Timer0 can be used to start ADC conversions as shown in the block diagram in Figure 77. Access R T0VAL is a 16-bit read-only register representing the current state of the counter. 5:4 3:2 Timer0 is a general-purpose, 16-bit timer (count down) with a programmable prescaler (see Figure 77). The prescaler source is the core clock frequency (HCLK) and can be scaled by factors of 1, 16, or 256. Default Value 0xFFFF Table 173. T0VAL Register 6 Timer0 (RTOS Timer) Access R/W T0LD is a 16-bit load register. Table 171. Hour:Minnute:Second:Hundredths Format Bit 31:24 23:22 21:16 15:14 13.8 7 6:0 Default Value 0x0000 Figure 77. Timer0 Block Diagram Rev. G | Page 85 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Timer1 (General-Purpose Timer) Timer1 is a general-purpose, 32-bit timer (count down or count up) with a programmable prescaler. The source can be the 32 kHz external crystal, the core clock frequency, or an external GPIO (P1.0 or P0.6). The maximum frequency of the clock input is 44 Mhz). This source can be scaled by a factor of 1, 16, 256, or 32,768. Data Sheet The Timer1 interface consists of five MMRs: T1LD, T1VAL, T1CON, T1CLRI, and T1CAP. Table 177. T1LD Register Name T1LD Address 0xFFFF0320 Default Value 0x00000000 Access R/W Default Value 0xFFFFFFFF Access R T1LD is a 32-bit load register. The counter can be formatted as a standard 32-bit value or as hours: minutes: seconds: hundredths. Table 178. T1VAL Register Timer1 has a capture register (T1CAP) that can be triggered by a selected IRQ source initial assertion. This feature can be used to determine the assertion of an event more accurately than the precision allowed by the RTOS timer when the IRQ is serviced. T1VAL is a 32-bit read-only register that represents the current state of the counter. Name T1CON 32-BIT UP/DOWN COUNTER TIMER1 IRQ ADC CONVERSION CAPTURE 04955-035 TIMER1 VALUE IRQ[31:0] Address 0xFFFF0328 Default Value 0x0000 Access R/W T1CON is the configuration MMR described in Table 180. 32-BIT LOAD PRESCALER /1, 16, 256 OR 32,768 Address 0xFFFF0324 Table 179. T1CON Register Timer1 can be used to start ADC conversions as shown in the block diagram in Figure 78. 32kHz OSCILLATOR HCLK P0.6 P1.0 Name T1VAL Figure 78. Timer1 Block Diagram Rev. G | Page 86 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Table 180. T1CON MMR Bit Descriptions Table 182. T1CAP Register Bit 31:18 17 Name T1CAP 16:12 11:9 000 001 010 011 8 7 6 5:4 00 01 10 11 3:0 0000 0100 1000 1111 Description Reserved. Event select bit. Set by user to enable time capture of an event. Cleared by user to disable time capture of an event. Event select range, 0 to 31. These events are as described in Table 160. All events are offset by two; that is, Event 2 in Table 160 becomes Event 0 for the purposes of Timer1. Clock select. Core clock (HCLK). External 32.768 kHz crystal. P1.0 rising edge triggered. P0.6 rising edge triggered. Count up. Set by user for Timer1 to count up. Cleared by user for Timer1 to count down by default. Timer1 enable bit. Set by user to enable Timer1. Cleared by user to disable Timer1 by default. Timer1 mode. Set by user to operate in periodic mode. Cleared by user to operate in free-running mode. Default mode. Format. Binary. Reserved. Hr: min: sec: hundredths (23 hours to 0 hour). Hr: min: sec: hundredths (255 hours to 0 hour). Prescale. Source Clock/1. Source Clock/16. Source Clock/256. Source Clock/32,768. Table 181. T1CLRI Register Name T1CLRI Address 0xFFFF032C Default Value 0xFF Access W T1CLRI is an 8-bit register. Writing any value to this register clears the Timer1 interrupt. Address 0xFFFF0330 Default Value 0x00000000 Access R/W T1CAP is a 32-bit register. It holds the value contained in T1VAL when a particular event occurs. This event must be selected in T1CON. Timer2 (Wake-Up Timer) Timer2 is a 32-bit wake-up timer (count down or count up) with a programmable prescaler. The source can be the 32 kHz external crystal, the core clock frequency, or the internal 32 kHz oscillator. The clock source can be scaled by a factor of 1, 16, 256, or 32,768. The wake-up timer continues to run when the core clock is disabled. The counter can be formatted as plain 32-bit value or as hours: minutes: seconds: hundredths. 32-BIT LOAD INTERNAL OSCILLATOR EXTERNAL CRYSTAL PRESCALER /1, 16, 256 OR 32,768 32-BIT UP/DOWN COUNTER TIMER2 IRQ HCLK 04955-036 Value TIMER2 VALUE Figure 79. Timer2 Block Diagram The Timer2 interface consists of four MMRs: T2LD, T2VAL, T2CON, and T2CLRI. Table 183. T2LD Register Name T2LD Address 0xFFFF0340 Default Value 0x00000000 Access R/W T2LD is a 32-bit register load register. Table 184. T2VAL Register Name T2VAL Address 0xFFFF0344 Default Value 0xFFFFFFFF Access R T2VAL is a 32-bit read-only register that represents the current state of the counter. Table 185. T2CON Register Name T2CON Address 0xFFFF0348 Default Value 0x0000 Access R/W T2CON is the configuration MMR described in Table 186. Rev. G | Page 87 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet 16-BIT LOAD Bit 31:11 10:9 Value Description Reserved. Clock source. External crystal. External crystal. Internal oscillator. Core clock (41 MHz/2CD). Count up. Set by user for Timer2 to count up. Cleared by user for Timer2 to count down by default. Timer2 enable bit. Set by user to enable Timer2. Cleared by user to disable Timer2 by default. Timer2 mode. Set by user to operate in periodic mode. Cleared by user to operate in free-running mode. Default mode. Format. Binary. Reserved. Hr: min: sec: Hundredths (23 hours to 0 hour). Hr: min: sec: Hundredths (255 hours to 0 hour). Prescale. Source Clock/1 by default. Source Clock/16. Source Clock/256 expected for Format 2 and Format 3. Source Clock/32,768. 00 01 10 11 8 7 6 5:4 00 01 10 11 3:0 0000 0100 1000 1111 Table 187. T2CLRI Register Name T2CLRI Address 0xFFFF034C Default Value 0xFF Access W T2CLRI is an 8-bit register. Writing any value to this register clears the Timer2 interrupt. Timer3 (Watchdog Timer) Timer3 has two modes of operation: normal mode and watchdog mode. The watchdog timer is used to recover from an illegal software state. Once enabled, it requires periodic servicing to prevent it from forcing a processor reset. Normal Mode Timer3 in normal mode is identical to Timer0, except for the clock source and the count-up functionality. The clock source is 32 kHz from the PLL and can be scaled by a factor of 1, 16, or 256 (see Figure 80). 32.768kHz PRESCALER /1, 16 OR 256 16-BIT UP/DOWN COUNTER WATCHDOG RESET TIMER3 IRQ TIMER3 VALUE 04955-037 Table 186. T2CON MMR Bit Descriptions Figure 80. Timer3 Block Diagram Watchdog Mode Watchdog mode is entered by setting Bit 5 in the T3CON MMR. Timer3 decreases from the value present in the T3LD register to 0. T3LD is used as the timeout. The maximum timeout can be 512 sec, using the prescaler/256, and full scale in T3LD. Timer3 is clocked by the internal 32 kHz crystal when operating in watchdog mode. Note that to enter watchdog mode successfully, Bit 5 in the T3CON MMR must be set after writing to the T3LD MMR. If the timer reaches 0, a reset or an interrupt occurs, depending on Bit 1 in the T3CON register. To avoid reset or interrupt, any value must be written to T3CLRI before the expiration period. This reloads the counter with T3LD and begins a new timeout period. When watchdog mode is entered, T3LD and T3CON are writeprotected. These two registers cannot be modified until a reset clears the watchdog enable bit, which causes Timer3 to exit watchdog mode. The Timer3 interface consists of four MMRs: T3LD, T3VAL, T3CON, and T3CLRI. Table 188. T3LD Register Name T3LD Address 0xFFFF0360 Default Value 0x0000 Access R/W T3LD is a 16-bit register load register. Table 189. T3VAL Register Name T3VAL Address 0xFFFF0364 Default Value 0xFFFF Access R T3VAL is a 16-bit read-only register that represents the current state of the counter. Table 190. T3CON Register Name T3CON Address 0xFFFF0368 Default Value 0x0000 Access R/W T3CON is the configuration MMR described in Table 191. Rev. G | Page 88 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Table 191. T3CON MMR Bit Descriptions The value 0x00 should not be used as an initial seed due to the properties of the polynomial. The value 0x00 is always guaranteed to force an immediate reset. The value of the LFSR cannot be read; it must be tracked/generated in software. Bit 15:9 8 Value 7 6 5 4 3:2 00 01 10 11 1 0 Description Reserved. Count up. Set by user for Timer3 to count up. Cleared by user for Timer3 to count down by default. Timer3 enable bit. Set by user to enable Timer3. Cleared by user to disable Timer3 by default. Timer3 mode. Set by user to operate in periodic mode. Cleared by user to operate in free-running mode. Default mode. Watchdog mode enable bit. Set by user to enable watchdog mode. Cleared by user to disable watchdog mode by default. Secure clear bit. Set by user to use the secure clear option. Cleared by user to disable the secure clear option by default. Prescale. Source Clock/1 by default. Source Clock/16. Source Clock/256. Undefined. Equivalent to 00. Watchdog IRQ option bit. Set by user to produce an IRQ instead of a reset when the watchdog reaches 0. Cleared by user to disable the IRQ option. Reserved. Address 0xFFFF036C Default Value 0x00 Access W T3CLRI is an 8-bit register. Writing any value to this register on successive occassions clears the Timer3 interrupt in normal mode or resets a new timeout period in watchdog mode. Note that the user must perform successive writes to this register to ensure resetting the timeout period. Secure Clear Bit (Watchdog Mode Only) The secure clear bit is provided for a higher level of protection. When set, a specific sequential value must be written to T3CLRI to avoid a watchdog reset. The value is a sequence generated by the 8-bit linear feedback shift register (LFSR) polynomial = X8 + X6 + X5 + X + 1, as shown in Figure 81. Q D 6 Q D 5 Q D 4 Q D 3 CLOCK Q D 2 Q D 1 Q D 0 2. 3. 4. 5. Enter initial seed, 0xAA, in T3CLRI before starting Timer3 in watchdog mode. Enter 0xAA in T3CLRI; Timer3 is reloaded. Enter 0x37 in T3CLRI; Timer3 is reloaded. Enter 0x6E in T3CLRI; Timer3 is reloaded. Enter 0x66. 0xDC was expected; the watchdog resets the chip. EXTERNAL MEMORY INTERFACING The ADuC7026 and ADuC7027 are the only models in their series that feature an external memory interface. The external memory interface requires a larger number of pins. This is why it is only available on larger pin count packages. The XMCFG MMR must be set to 1 to use the external port. Although 32-bit addresses are supported internally, only the lower 16 bits of the address are on external pins. The memory interface can address up to four 128 kB blocks of asynchronous memory (SRAM or/and EEPROM). The pins required for interfacing to an external memory are shown in Table 193. Pin AD[16:1] A16 MS[3:0] WS RS AE BHE, BLE Function Address/data bus Extended addressing for 8-bit memory only Memory select Write strobe Read strobe Address latch enable Byte write capability There are four external memory regions available, as described in Table 194. Associated with each region are the MS[3:0] pins. These signals allow access to the particular region of external memory. The size of each memory region can be 128 kB maximum, 64 k x 16 or 128 k x 8. To access 128 k with an 8-bit memory, an extra address line (A16) is provided (see the example in Figure 82). The four regions are configured independently. Table 194. Memory Regions 04955-038 Q D 7 1. Table 193. External Memory Interfacing Pins Table 192. T3CLRI Register Name T3CLRI The following is an example of a sequence: Figure 81. 8-Bit LFSR The initial value or seed is written to T3CLRI before entering watchdog mode. After entering watchdog mode, a write to T3CLRI must match this expected value. If it matches, the LFSR is advanced to the next state when the counter reload occurs. If it fails to match the expected state, a reset is immediately generated, even if the count has not yet expired. Address Start 0x10000000 0x20000000 0x30000000 0x40000000 Address End 0x1000FFFF 0x2000FFFF 0x3000FFFF 0x4000FFFF Contents External Memory 0 External Memory 1 External Memory 2 External Memory 3 Each external memory region can be controlled through three MMRs: XMCFG, XMxCON, and XMxPAR. Rev. G | Page 89 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 EEPROM 64k x 16-BIT ADuC7026/ ADuC7027 Table 198. XMxPAR Registers A16 AD15:AD0 Name XM0PAR XM1PAR XM2PAR XM3PAR D0:D15 LATCH A0:A15 AE MS0 MS1 CS WS WE RS OE Data Sheet Bit 15 A16 A0:A15 04955-039 CS Figure 82. Interfacing to External EEPROM/RAM Table 195. XMCFG Register Name XMCFG Address 0xFFFFF000 Default Value 0x00 Access R/W XMCFG is set to 1 to enable external memory access. This must be set to 1 before any port pins function as external memory access pins. The port pins must also be individually enabled via the GPxCON MMR. Table 196. XMxCON Registers Name XM0CON XM1CON XM2CON XM3CON Address 0xFFFFF010 0xFFFFF014 0xFFFFF018 0xFFFFF01C Default Value 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 Access R/W R/W R/W R/W XMxCON are the control registers for each memory region. They allow the enabling/disabling of a memory region and control the data bus width of the memory region. Table 197. XMxCON MMR Bit Descriptions Bit 1 0 Access R/W R/W R/W R/W Table 199. XMxPAR MMR Bit Descriptions D0:D7 OE Default Value 0x70FF 0x70FF 0x70FF 0x70FF XMxPAR are registers that define the protocol used for accessing the external memory for each memory region. RAM 128k x 8-BIT WE Address 0xFFFFF020 0xFFFFF024 0xFFFFF028 0xFFFFF02C 14:12 11 10 9 8 7:4 3:0 Description Enable byte write strobe. This bit is used only for two, 8-bit memory devices sharing the same memory region. Set by the user to gate the A0 output with the WS output. This allows byte write capability without using BHE and BLE signals. Cleared by user to use BHE and BLE signals. Number of wait states on the address latch enable STROBE. Reserved. Extra address hold time. Set by user to disable extra hold time. Cleared by user to enable one clock cycle of hold on the address in read and write. Extra bus transition time on read. Set by user to disable extra bus transition time. Cleared by user to enable one extra clock before and after the read strobe (RS). Extra bus transition time on write. Set by user to disable extra bus transition time. Cleared by user to enable one extra clock before and after the write strobe (WS). Number of write wait states. Select the number of wait states added to the length of the WS pulse. 0x0 is 1 clock; 0xF is 16 clock cycles (default value). Number of read wait states. Select the number of wait states added to the length of the RS pulse. 0x0 is 1 clock; 0xF is 16 clock cycles (default value). Figure 83, Figure 84, Figure 85, and Figure 86 show the timing for a read cycle, a read cycle with address hold and bus turn cycles, a write cycle with address and write hold cycles, and a write cycle with wait sates, respectively. Description Selects data bus width. Set by user to select a 16-bit data bus. Cleared by user to select an 8-bit data bus. Enables memory region. Set by user to enable the memory region. Cleared by user to disable the memory region. Rev. G | Page 90 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 UCLK AD[16:0] ADDRESS DATA MSx 04955-040 AE RS Figure 83. External Memory Read Cycle UCLK AD[16:0] ADDRESS DATA EXTRA ADDRESS HOLD TIME XMxPAR (BIT 10) MSx AE BUS TURN OUT CYCLE (BIT 9) BUS TURN OUT CYCLE (BIT 9) Figure 84. External Memory Read Cycle with Address Hold and Bus Turn Cycles Rev. G | Page 91 of 101 04955-041 RS ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet UCLK AD[16:0] ADDRESS DATA EXTRA ADDRESS HOLD TIME (BIT 10) MSx AE WRITE HOLD ADDRESS AND DATA CYCLES (BIT 8) WRITE HOLD ADDRESS AND DATA CYCLES (BIT 8) 04955-042 WS Figure 85. External Memory Write Cycle with Address and Write Hold Cycles UCLK AD[16:0] ADDRESS DATA MSx AE 1 ADDRESS WAIT STATE (BIT 14 TO BIT 12) 1 WRITE STROBE WAIT STATE (BIT 7 TO BIT 4) Figure 86. External Memory Write Cycle with Wait States Rev. G | Page 92 of 101 04955-043 WS Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 HARDWARE DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS POWER SUPPLIES The ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 operational power supply voltage range is 2.7 V to 3.6 V. Separate analog and digital power supply pins (AVDD and IOVDD, respectively) allow AVDD to be kept relatively free of noisy digital signals often present on the system IOVDD line. In this mode, the part can also operate with split supplies; that is, it can use different voltage levels for each supply. For example, the system can be designed to operate with an IOVDD voltage level of 3.3 V whereas the AVDD level can be at 3 V or vice versa. A typical split supply configuration is shown in Figure 87. + - ANALOG SUPPLY 10F 10F ADuC7026 26 54 AVDD IOVDD If decoupling values recommended in the Power Supplies section do not sufficiently dampen all noise sources below 50 mV on IOVDD, a filter such as the one shown in Figure 89 is recommended. 73 74 0.1F GNDREF 8 The IOVDD supply is sensitive to high frequency noise because it is the supply source for the internal oscillator and PLL circuits. When the internal PLL loses lock, the clock source is removed by a gating circuit from the CPU, and the ARM7TDMI core stops executing code until the PLL regains lock. This feature ensures that no flash interface timings or ARM7TDMI timings are violated. Typically, frequency noise greater than 50 kHz and 50 mV p-p on top of the supply causes the core to stop working. + - DACV DD 75 0.1F IOVDD Supply Sensitivity DACGND 70 53 IOGND 26 REFGND 67 DIGITAL + SUPPLY - 10F Figure 87. External Dual Supply Connections BEAD DIGITAL SUPPLY 1.6 10F ADuC7026 AVDD 26 54 IOVDD 0.1F 73 74 DACV DD 75 GNDREF 8 54 25 53 Linear Voltage Regulator Each ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 requires a single 3.3 V supply, but the core logic requires a 2.6 V supply. An onchip linear regulator generates the 2.6 V from IOVDD for the core logic. The LVDD pin is the 2.6 V supply for the core logic. An external compensation capacitor of 0.47 F must be connected between LVDD and DGND (as close as possible to these pins) to act as a tank of charge as shown in Figure 90. 0.1F ADuC7026 IOGND AGND 71 REFGND 67 04955-045 53 IOGND Figure 89. Recommended IOVDD Supply Filter DACGND 70 25 IOVDD 0.1F As an alternative to providing two separate power supplies, the user can reduce noise on AVDD by placing a small series resistor and/or ferrite bead between AVDD and IOVDD and then decoupling AVDD separately to ground. An example of this configuration is shown in Figure 88. With this configuration, other analog circuitry (such as op amps and voltage reference) can be powered from the AVDD supply line as well. + 10F - ADuC7026 1H AGND 71 04955-044 25 04955-087 DIGITAL SUPPLY Finally, note that the analog and digital ground pins on the ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 must be referenced to the same system ground reference point at all times. 27 LVDD 28 DGND 0.47F Note that in both Figure 87 and Figure 88, a large value (10 F) reservoir capacitor sits on IOVDD, and a separate 10 F capacitor sits on AVDD. In addition, local small-value (0.1 F) capacitors are located at each AVDD and IOVDD pin of the chip. As per standard design practice, be sure to include all of these capacitors and ensure that the smaller capacitors are close to each AVDD pin with trace lengths as short as possible. Connect the ground terminal of each of these capacitors directly to the underlying ground plane. 04955-046 Figure 88. External Single Supply Connections Figure 90. Voltage Regulator Connections The LVDD pin should not be used for any other chip. It is also recommended to use excellent power supply decoupling on IOVDD to help improve line regulation performance of the onchip voltage regulator. Rev. G | Page 93 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 GROUNDING AND BOARD LAYOUT RECOMMENDATIONS As with all high resolution data converters, special attention must be paid to grounding and PC board layout of the ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29-based designs to achieve optimum performance from the ADCs and DAC. Although the parts have separate pins for analog and digital ground (AGND and IOGND), the user must not tie these to two separate ground planes unless the two ground planes are connected very close to the part. This is illustrated in the simplified example shown in Figure 91a. In systems where digital and analog ground planes are connected together somewhere else (at the system power supply, for example), the planes cannot be reconnected near the part because a ground loop results. In these cases, tie all the ADuC7019/20/21/ 22/24/25/26/27/28/29 AGND and IOGND pins to the analog ground plane, as illustrated in Figure 91b. In systems with only one ground plane, ensure that the digital and analog components are physically separated onto separate halves of the board so that digital return currents do not flow near analog circuitry (and vice versa). The ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 can then be placed between the digital and analog sections, as illustrated in Figure 91c. PLACE ANALOG COMPONENTS HERE For example, do not power components on the analog side (as seen in Figure 91b) with IOVDD because that forces return currents from IOVDD to flow through AGND. Avoid digital currents flowing under analog circuitry, which can occur if a noisy digital chip is placed on the left half of the board (shown in Figure 91c). If possible, avoid large discontinuities in the ground plane(s) such as those formed by a long trace on the same layer because they force return signals to travel a longer path. In addition, make all connections to the ground plane directly, with little or no trace separating the pin from its via to ground. When connecting fast logic signals (rise/fall time < 5 ns) to any of the ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 digital inputs, add a series resistor to each relevant line to keep rise and fall times longer than 5 ns at the part's input pins. A value of 100 or 200 is usually sufficient to prevent high speed signals from coupling capacitively into the part and affecting the accuracy of ADC conversions. CLOCK OSCILLATOR The clock source for the ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 can be generated by the internal PLL or by an external clock input. To use the internal PLL, connect a 32.768 kHz parallel resonant crystal between XCLKI and XCLKO, and connect a capacitor from each pin to ground as shown in Figure 92. The crystal allows the PLL to lock correctly to give a frequency of 41.78 MHz. If no external crystal is present, the internal oscillator is used to give a typical frequency of 41.78 MHz 3%. PLACE DIGITAL COMPONENTS HERE 45 12pF AGND ADuC7026 XCLKI 32.768kHz DGND 12pF 44 XCLKO TO INTERNAL PLL 04955-048 a. Data Sheet Figure 92. External Parallel Resonant Crystal Connections b. PLACE ANALOG COMPONENTS HERE PLACE DIGITAL COMPONENTS HERE AGND To use an external source clock input instead of the PLL (see Figure 93), Bit 1 and Bit 0 of PLLCON must be modified.The external clock uses P0.7 and XCLK. DGND XCLKO ADuC7026 PLACE ANALOG COMPONENTS HERE EXTERNAL CLOCK SOURCE PLACE DIGITAL COMPONENTS HERE DGND 04955-047 c. Figure 91. System Grounding Schemes In all of these scenarios, and in more complicated real-life applications, the user should pay particular attention to the flow of current from the supplies and back to ground. Make sure the return paths for all currents are as close as possible to the paths the currents took to reach their destinations. XCLK TO FREQUENCY DIVIDER 04955-049 XCLKI Figure 93. Connecting an External Clock Source Using an external clock source, the ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/ 25/26/27/28/29-specified operational clock speed range is 50 kHz to 44 MHz 1%, which ensures correct operation of the analog peripherals and Flash/EE. Rev. G | Page 94 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 3.3V POWER-ON RESET OPERATION IOVDD An internal power-on reset (POR) is implemented on the ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29. For LVDD below 2.35 V typical, the internal POR holds the part in reset. As LVDD rises above 2.35 V, an internal timer times out for, typically, 128 ms before the part is released from reset. The user must ensure that the power supply IOVDD reaches a stable 2.7 V minimum level by this time. Likewise, on power-down, the internal POR holds the part in reset until LVDD drops below 2.35 V. 2.6V 2.35V TYP LVDD 128ms TYP POR Figure 94 illustrates the operation of the internal POR in detail. 04955-050 0.12ms TYP TYPICAL SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MRST A typical ADuC7020 configuration is shown in Figure 95. It summarizes some of the hardware considerations discussed in the previous sections. The bottom of the CSP package has an exposed pad that must be soldered to a metal plate on the board for mechanical reasons. The metal plate of the board can be connected to ground. + Figure 94. Internal Power-On Reset Operation 10 - 0.01F RS232 INTERFACE* 36 35 34 1 C1+ VCC 16 29 2 V+ GND 15 1 3 C1- T1OUT 14 2 4 DAC0 27 4 C2+ R1 IN 13 3 26 5 C2- R1 OUT 12 4 ADuC7020 XCLKO 24 7 T2OUT T2IN 10 6 8 R2 IN R2 OUT 9 7 8 TMS 23 9 TDI 22 10 P0.0 RST 5 7 TRST 11 DGND T1IN LVDD V- IOVDD 6 IOGND 25 TDO XCLKI TCK 6 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 DVDD 0.47F 100k DVDD 100k STANDARD D-TYPE SERIAL COMMS CONNECTOR TO PC HOST ADM3202 30 28 1k 100k 31 GNDREF 5 DVDD 32.768kHz 8 21 20 9 DVDD 1k * EXTERNAL UART TRANSCEIVER INTEGRATED IN SYSTEM OR AS PART OF AN EXTERNAL DONGLE AS DESCRIBED IN uC006. AVDD DVDD 1.5 TDI OUT 270 TMS ADP3333-3.3 10F IN GND SD 10F 0.1F TCK TDO NOT CONNECTED IN THIS EXAMPLE 04955-051 JTAG CONNECTOR 32 3 2 TRST 33 P1.1 37 VREF 39 P1.0 38 AVDD 40 1 AGND DVDD ADC0 AVDD 0.47F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2.35V TYP Figure 95. Typical System Configuration Rev. G | Page 95 of 101 ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet DEVELOPMENT TOOLS Software PC-BASED TOOLS Four types of development systems are available for the ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 family. The ADuC7026 QuickStart Plus is intended for new users who want to have a comprehensive hardware development environment. Because the ADuC7026 contains the superset of functions available on the ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/ 26/27/28/29, it is suitable for users who wish to develop on any of the parts in this family. All parts are fully code compatible. The ADuC7019, ADuC7024, and ADuC7026 QuickStart systems are intended for users who already have an emulator. These systems consist of the following PC-based (Windows(R) compatible) hardware and software development tools. Hardware ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 evaluation board Serial port programming cable RDI-compliant JTAG emulator (included in the ADuC7026 QuickStart Plus only) Integrated development environment, incorporating assembler, compiler, and nonintrusive JTAG-based debugger Serial downloader software Example code Miscellaneous CD-ROM documentation IN-CIRCUIT SERIAL DOWNLOADER The serial downloader is a Windows application that allows the user to serially download an assembled program to the on-chip program Flash/EE memory via the serial port on a standard PC. The UART-based serial downloader is included in all the development systems and is usable with the ADuC7019/20/21/ 22/24/25/26/27/28/29 parts that do not contain the I suffix in the Ordering Guide. An I2C based serial downloader and a USB-to-I2C adaptor board, USB-EA-CONVZ, are also available at www.analog.com. The I2C-based serial downloader is only usable with the part models containing the I suffix (see Ordering Guide). Rev. G | Page 96 of 101 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 OUTLINE DIMENSIONS 6.10 6.00 SQ 5.90 PIN 1 INDICATOR 0.30 0.25 0.18 31 0.50 BSC 1 4.25 4.10 SQ 3.95 EXPOSED PAD 21 0.80 0.75 0.70 11 0.25 MIN BOTTOM VIEW 0.05 MAX 0.02 NOM COPLANARITY 0.08 0.20 REF SEATING PLANE 10 20 FOR PROPER CONNECTION OF THE EXPOSED PAD, REFER TO THE PIN CONFIGURATION AND FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS SECTION OF THIS DATA SHEET. 05-06-2011-A 0.45 0.40 0.35 TOP VIEW PIN 1 INDICATOR 40 30 COMPLIANT TO JEDEC STANDARDS MO-220-WJJD. Figure 96. 40-Lead Lead Frame Chip Scale Package [LFCSP_WQ] 6 x 6 mm Body, Very Very Thin Quad (CP-40-9) Dimensions shown in millimeters 9.10 9.00 SQ 8.90 0.60 MAX 0.60 MAX 64 49 48 1 PIN 1 INDICATOR PIN 1 INDICATOR 8.85 8.75 SQ 8.65 0.50 BSC 0.50 0.40 0.30 33 32 0.05 MAX 0.02 NOM 0.30 0.23 0.18 0.25 MIN 0.20 REF FOR PROPER CONNECTION OF THE EXPOSED PAD, REFER TO THE PIN CONFIGURATION AND FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS SECTION OF THIS DATA SHEET. *COMPLIANT TO JEDEC STANDARDS MO-220-VMMD-4 EXCEPT FOR EXPOSED PAD DIMENSION Figure 97. 64-Lead Lead Frame Chip Scale Package [LFCSP_VQ] 9 mm x 9 mm Body, Very Thin Quad (CP-64-1) Dimensions shown in millimeters Rev. G | Page 97 of 101 06-13-2012-A SEATING PLANE 16 7.50 REF 0.80 MAX 0.65 TYP 12 MAX 4.70 SQ 4.55 17 BOTTOM VIEW TOP VIEW 1.00 0.85 0.80 *4.85 EXPOSED PAD ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 0.75 0.60 0.45 Data Sheet 12.20 12.00 SQ 11.80 1.60 MAX 64 49 1 48 PIN 1 10.20 10.00 SQ 9.80 TOP VIEW (PINS DOWN) 1.45 1.40 1.35 0.15 0.05 SEATING PLANE 0.20 0.09 7 3.5 0 16 0.08 COPLANARITY 33 32 17 VIEW A 0.27 0.22 0.17 0.50 BSC LEAD PITCH VIEW A 051706-A ROTATED 90 CCW COMPLIANT TO JEDEC STANDARDS MS-026-BCD Figure 98. 64-Lead Low Profile Quad Flat Package [LQFP] (ST-64-2) Dimensions shown in millimeters 0.75 0.60 0.45 14.20 14.00 SQ 13.80 1.60 MAX 80 61 60 1 PIN 1 12.20 12.00 SQ 11.80 TOP VIEW (PINS DOWN) 0.15 0.05 SEATING PLANE VIEW A 0.20 0.09 7 3.5 0 0.08 COPLANARITY 20 41 21 VIEW A 0.50 BSC LEAD PITCH ROTATED 90 CCW 40 0.27 0.22 0.17 COMPLIANT TO JEDEC STANDARDS MS-026-BDD Figure 99. 80-Lead Low Profile Quad Flat Package [LQFP] (ST-80-1) Dimensions shown in millimeters Rev. G | Page 98 of 101 051706-A 1.45 1.40 1.35 Data Sheet ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 6.10 6.00 SQ 5.90 A1 CORNER INDEX AREA 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 A 1.50 SQ BALL A1 PAD CORNER B 4.55 SQ C D TOP VIEW E 0.65 F G H BOTTOM VIEW DETAIL A *1.40 MAX DETAIL A 0.65 MIN 0.15 MIN 0.45 0.40 0.35 BALL DIAMETER COPLANARITY 0.10 030907-B SEATING PLANE *COMPLIANT TO JEDEC STANDARDS MO-225 WITH THE EXCEPTION TO PACKAGE HEIGHT. Figure 100. 64-Ball Chip Scale Package Ball Grid Array [CSP_BGA] (BC-64-4) Dimensions shown in millimeters 5.05 5.00 SQ 4.95 A1 CORNER INDEX AREA 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 A BALL A1 INDICATOR TOP VIEW B C 3.90 BSC SQ D E F G 1.20 MAX 0.55 BSC DETAIL A 0.35 0.20 0.45 0.40 0.35 BALL DIAMETER 1.00 MAX 0.85 MIN SEATING PLANE Figure 101. 49-Ball Chip Scale Package Ball Grid Array [CSP_BGA] (BC-49-1) Dimensions shown in millimeters Rev. G | Page 99 of 101 COPLANARITY 0.05 MAX 012006-0 0.65 BSC DETAIL A BOTTOM VIEW ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 Data Sheet ORDERING GUIDE Model1, 2 ADuC7019BCPZ62I ADuC7019BCPZ62I-RL ADuC7019BCPZ62IRL7 ADuC7020BCPZ62 ADuC7020BCPZ62-RL7 ADuC7020BCPZ62I ADuC7020BCPZ62I-RL ADuC7020BCPZ62IRL7 ADuC7021BCPZ62 ADuC7021BCPZ62-RL ADuC7021BCPZ62-RL7 ADuC7021BCPZ62I ADuC7021BCPZ62I-RL ADuC7021BCPZ32 ADuC7021BCPZ32-RL7 ADuC7022BCPZ62 ADuC7022BCPZ62-RL7 ADuC7022BCPZ32 ADuC7022BCPZ32-RL ADuC7024BCPZ62 ADuC7024BCPZ62-RL7 ADuC7024BCPZ62I ADuC7024BCPZ62I-RL ADuC7024BSTZ62 ADuC7024BSTZ62-RL ADuC7025BCPZ62 ADuC7025BCPZ62-RL ADuC7025BCPZ32 ADuC7025BCPZ32-RL ADuC7025BSTZ62 ADuC7025BSTZ62-RL ADuC7026BSTZ62 ADuC7026BSTZ62-RL ADuC7026BSTZ62I ADuC7026BSTZ62I-RL ADuC7027BSTZ62 ADuC7027BSTZ62-RL ADuC7027BSTZ62I ADuC7027BSTZ62I-RL ADuC7028BBCZ62 ADuC7028BBCZ62-RL ADuC7029BBCZ62 ADuC7029BBCZ62-RL ADuC7029BBCZ62I ADuC7029BBCZ62I-RL ADC Channels3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 16 16 16 16 8 8 7 7 7 7 DAC Channels 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 FLASH/ RAM 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 32 kB/4 kB 32 kB/4 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 32 kB/4 kB 32 kB/4 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 32 kB/4 kB 32 kB/4 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB 62 kB/8 kB GPIO 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 30 30 22 22 22 22 Downloader I 2C I 2C I 2C UART UART I 2C I 2C I 2C UART UART UART I 2C I 2C UART UART UART UART UART UART UART UART I 2C I 2C UART UART UART UART UART UART UART UART UART UART I 2C I2C UART UART I 2C I2C UART UART UART UART I 2C I2C Temperature Range -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C -40C to +125C Rev. G | Page 100 of 101 Package Description 40-Lead LFCSP_WQ 40-Lead LFCSP_WQ 40-Lead LFCSP_WQ 40-Lead LFCSP_WQ 40-Lead LFCSP_WQ 40-Lead LFCSP_WQ 40-Lead LFCSP_WQ 40-Lead LFCSP_WQ 40-Lead LFCSP_WQ 40-Lead LFCSP_WQ 40-Lead LFCSP_WQ 40-Lead LFCSP_WQ 40-Lead LFCSP_WQ 40-Lead LFCSP_WQ 40-Lead LFCSP_WQ 40-Lead LFCSP_WQ 40-Lead LFCSP_WQ 40-Lead LFCSP_WQ 40-Lead LFCSP_WQ 64-Lead LFCSP_VQ 64-Lead LFCSP_VQ 64-Lead LFCSP_VQ 64-Lead LFCSP_VQ 64-Lead LQFP 64-Lead LQFP 64-Lead LFCSP_VQ 64-Lead LFCSP_VQ 64-Lead LFCSP_VQ 64-Lead LFCSP_VQ 64-Lead LQFP 64-Lead LQFP 80-Lead LQFP 80-Lead LQFP 80-Lead LQFP 80-Lead LQFP 80-Lead LQFP 80-Lead LQFP 80-Lead LQFP 80-Lead LQFP 64-Ball CSP_BGA 64-Ball CSP_BGA 49-Ball CSP_BGA 49-Ball CSP_BGA 49-Ball CSP_BGA 49-Ball CSP_BGA Package Option CP-40-9 CP-40-9 CP-40-9 CP-40-9 CP-40-9 CP-40-9 CP-40-9 CP-40-9 CP-40-9 CP-40-9 CP-40-9 CP-40-9 CP-40-9 CP-40-9 CP-40-9 CP-40-9 CP-40-9 CP-40-9 CP-40-9 CP-64-1 CP-64-1 CP-64-1 CP-64-1 ST-64-2 ST-64-2 CP-64-1 CP-64-1 CP-64-1 CP-64-1 ST-64-2 ST-64-2 ST-80-1 ST-80-1 ST-80-1 ST-80-1 ST-80-1 ST-80-1 ST-80-1 ST-80-1 BC-64-4 BC-64-4 BC-49-1 BC-49-1 BC-49-1 BC-49-1 Ordering Quantity 2,500 750 750 2,500 750 2,500 750 2,500 750 750 2,500 750 2,500 1,000 2,500 2,500 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 2,500 4,000 4,000 Data Sheet Model1, 2 EVAL-ADuC7020MKZ EVAL-ADuC7020QSZ ADuC7019/20/21/22/24/25/26/27/28/29 ADC Channels3 DAC Channels FLASH/ RAM GPIO Downloader Temperature Range EVAL-ADuC7020QSPZ EVAL-ADuC7024QSZ EVAL-ADuC7026QSZ EVAL-ADuC7026QSPZ EVAL-ADuC7028QSZ EVAL-ADUC7029QSZ Package Description ADuC7020 MiniKit ADuC7020 QuickStart Development System ADuC7020 QuickStart Development System ADuC7024 QuickStart Development System ADuC7026 QuickStar Development System ADuC7026 QuickStart Plus Development System ADuC7028 QuickStart Development System ADuC7029 QuickStart Development System 1 Z = RoHS Compliant Part. Models ADuC7026 and ADuC7027 include an external memory interface. 3 One of the ADC channels is internally buffered for ADuC7019 models. 2 I2C refers to a communications protocol originally developed by Phillips Semiconductors (now NXP Semiconductors). (c)2005-2015 Analog Devices, Inc. All rights reserved. Trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. D04955-0-12/15(G) Rev. G | Page 101 of 101 Package Option Ordering Quantity